JP2011152214A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To permits a player to strengthen his desire to take part in a game involving operations, and to increase excitement and enjoyment of a game. <P>SOLUTION: A performance control microcomputer carries out a performance (a selection performance in this embodiment) by using a prescribed performance device (a performance display device 9 in this embodiment). The game machine includes a stick controller 122 which can be vibrated and controls the stick controller 122 to vibrate for prescribed vibration time. The performance (the selection performance in this embodiment) carried out by the performance control microcomputer includes a specific performance (a performance showing a decision on a special round for example) chosen when the stick controller 122 is operated during the prescribed vibration time when the stick controller 122 is vibrated. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and a parrot machine capable of executing a predetermined game.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game media are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Also, when a game medium is inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated by operating the operation lever, and a combination of stop symbols is specified when the symbols are stopped by operating the stop button There are cases where a predetermined number of premium game media are paid out to the player. Also, when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the number of game media taken in, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated by operating the operation lever, and the symbols are stopped when the symbols are stopped by operating the stop button. When the combination becomes a combination of specific symbols, a predetermined number of game media may be paid out to the player. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Some such gaming machines are configured to include operation means that can be operated by a player (see Patent Document 1). For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a sound effect is generated from the speaker or the background display is changed based on the operation means (stop button) being pressed during execution of variable display of symbols. It is described that you let me. Further, it is described that the lamp disposed on the game board is flashed flashingly based on the pressing operation of the operating means during the big hitting operation. Further, it is described that, at the end of the big hitting operation, the subsequent symbol fluctuation sound is changed from the normal number of times based on the pressing operation of the operating means.

JP 2004-129984 A (paragraphs 0023-0028, paragraphs 0031, 0032)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the player's willingness to participate in the game accompanied by the operation is increased to some extent by generating a specific effect based on the operation means being operated by the player. ing. However, no notification is given as to when the operating means should be operated. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize when to operate the operation means, and the player's willingness to participate in the game involving the operation is not necessarily sufficiently increased.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's willingness to participate in a game that involves an operation and can improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention performs an effect (for example, a selection effect) using an operation means (for example, a stick controller 122) that can be operated by the player and a predetermined effect device (for example, an effect display device 9). Execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S903 and S907 to S919 based on the determination result of step S887 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the operation means can be vibrated (for example, a stick As shown in FIG. 2, the controller 122 is configured to vibrate by incorporating a vibrator motor 126), and the operating means vibrates over a predetermined vibration period (for example, 5 seconds, 3 seconds, or 1 second). Vibration operation control means (for example, step S910 in the production control microcomputer 100) The effect executed by the effect execution means is a specific effect (for example, selected when the operation means is operated within a predetermined vibration period during which the operation means is vibrated) 70 (7) including an effect to display that the special round has been determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect for the player by the vibration of the operation means, and to notify the player of the timing for operating the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in a game that involves an operation, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The operation means has a stick shape and can be operated in a plurality of directions (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, it is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) and configured to be tiltable in a plurality of directions (front and rear, right and left). The effect execution means executes a specific effect when the operation is performed in a predetermined direction (for example, the right direction with respect to the player) among the plurality of directions (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). (If the answer is Y in step S917, the process data in step S918 is not switched, and the process data selected in step S888 is used as it is to execute step S903 to execute the remaining effects of the selected effect.) It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the operation means can be operated in various operation modes, an effect that requires a more complicated operation technique can be executed, and an interest in the game can be improved.

  When the operation means is operated during a period other than the predetermined vibration period during which the operating means is vibrated, the effect executing means is different from the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (11)). (For example, when the display control microcomputer 100 is N in step S917 in step S917, step S918 is executed to switch to process data for operation failure and after switching.) The process data may be used to execute step S903). According to such a configuration, when the operation means is operated during a period other than the predetermined vibration period, an effect different from the specific effect is executed, so the types of effects using the operation means are increased. be able to. Therefore, the range of effects using the operating means is widened, and the interest in games can be improved.

  The gaming machine is configured to include timing determination means (for example, a part that executes step S1605 in the production control microcomputer 100) that determines the timing for vibrating the operation means from among a plurality of types of timing. Also good. According to such a configuration, the timing at which the operating means is vibrated can be varied in various ways, the range of effects using the operating means can be expanded, and the interest in games can be improved.

  The gaming machine is a gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the variable display of the identification information, and a vibration period determining means that determines a predetermined vibration period from a plurality of types of vibration periods ( For example, the vibration control unit 100 includes a portion that executes step S1603 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the vibration period determination unit increases the number of times that the specific game state is controlled until a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the vibration time as 5 seconds, 3 seconds or 1 second according to the number of big hits as shown in FIG. 65). May be. According to such a configuration, the predetermined vibration period becomes longer as the number of times of control to the specific gaming state increases, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the vibration, so there is an opportunity to operate with the operating means. Increasing the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a stick controller. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the determination result memory buffer at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous notice effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous notice effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for continuous notice determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an operation notification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a vibration time / notice type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a vibration timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of an operation warning effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of an operation warning effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of an operation warning effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the handling when the change display of a 2nd special symbol interrupts when performing the continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to a 1st start winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a selection effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a selection production | presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the determination method of vibration time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a vibration timing determination table (for selection effects). It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of selection production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of selection production. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a pseudo | simulation ream. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the continuous notice lottery prohibition period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the allocation state of the determination value in the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the judgment value in the fluctuation pattern classification judgment table for deviation when it sees paying attention also to the fluctuation pattern classification including the fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-continuity as a fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification judgment table for deviation | shift when it sees paying attention also to the variation pattern classification containing the variation pattern with a pseudo | simulation series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of allocation in the range to which the variation pattern classification with super reach is allocated.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes an operation rod 122A that is held by the player, and a trigger button 121 is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 122A (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is placed when the player holds the operation rod 122A). Is provided. The trigger button 121 is operated in a predetermined direction by, for example, performing a push / pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. A trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 4) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button 121 or the like may be built in the operation rod 122A. A tilt direction sensor unit 123 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 122A may be provided inside the lower pan main body or the like below the stick controller 122. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod 122A when viewed from the player's side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. 4) combining a parallel sensor pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 6 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod 122A when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the two transmission type photosensors. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller 122 in the lower plate is not limited to the central portion of the lower plate, and may be a position near to the left or right.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  The trigger button 121 provided on the stick controller 122 is configured such that an instruction operation can be performed by performing a push-pull operation with an operating finger while the player holds the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand. ing. On the other hand, the push button 120 is provided at a predetermined position of the glass door frame 2 that forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 122, and in a state where the player does not hold the operation rod 122 A of the stick controller 122. In addition, an instruction operation can be performed by pressing the operation hand. Therefore, the trigger button 121 is difficult to perform a continuous hitting operation, which is a continuous instruction operation, as compared to the push button 120.

  Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate. In this embodiment, for example, the center of gravity of the shaft of the vibrator motor 126 is biased or a weight is attached, and the vibrator motor 126 is rotationally controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 to generate vibrations. It is controlled so as to be vibrated.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game and battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game and battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If control is possible, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In this case, a display color reminiscent of a big hit in the 4th symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from a loss is displayed. The display color may be different depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is a promising jackpot or a regular jackpot), and a jackpot that can be expected to win a game ball at the jackpot ( For example, the display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, the round that is continued in the big hit game The display colors when the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off may be assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off to prevent them from becoming invisible. Scene image different display color (e.g., black) it is desirable that.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the trigger button 121 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. Further, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (probability big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 14). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 7, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are variation patterns used when suddenly sudden change is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, when normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with a pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a probable big hit, a normal CA3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are included. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, a normal CA3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity, It is classified into Super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 9A is a jackpot determination value.

  9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 9B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 9B and 9C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that “probability” shown in FIG. 9A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  9D and 9E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 9D determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 9E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, 10 determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 3 is assigned to the jackpot type determination table 131b for “sudden probability change big hit” (a ratio of 3/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, there are two rounds of sudden probable big hits and more than the gaming value. The case where 15 rounds of big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) is determined as the second specific gaming state to which the amount of gaming value is given will be explained. However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, Although the case where it is determined to be one specific gaming state is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specified gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and an effect in a manner that encourages whether or not the big hit continues (so-called rank-up bonus effect) You may make it perform. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is changed to the probable change state and the short time state is also entered. (See steps S170 and S171 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big round gaming state of 15 rounds and is not shifted to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state is ended, but is shifted only to the short time state (see step S167 described later). . Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is maintained until the execution of the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of variable displays is ended (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big winning opening is smaller than in “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, after the two-round jackpot gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability changing state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability changing state and also to the short time state. Step S170 to be described later). , S171 However, in order to make it more difficult to recognize whether it is a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit, it shifts to a probability change state (high probability state) only when a sudden probability change big hit occurs during the probability change state. At the same time, the transition to the short-time state (high base state) is made, and in the case of sudden hits in the normal state, only the high-probability state is transitioned and the short-time state (high base state) is not transitioned. It is good.) After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained (described later). Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10 (A) used when the big hit type is “normal big hit” and FIG. 10 (B) used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  FIG. 10D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 (D), when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 11A to 11C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 11A shows a variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total pending storage number is less than 3. FIG. 11B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 11C shows a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss that is used when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a time reduction state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11, the case where the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state and the case where the separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C are used for the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more are shown. However, a common variation pattern type determination table for losing may be used in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11C, a case is shown in which one variation variation / temporal deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used. However, a variation variation type classification determination table for certain variation / shortening states is used. A plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  The “specific variable display pattern” refers to a variation pattern such as a variation pattern with super reach, which is set with a high expectation level for at least a big hit and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” is an appearance rate (probability) at which a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) by the specific variable display pattern is executed. Show. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B) are assigned. The “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, as shown in this embodiment, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect, and the like. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state. However, is the current gaming state in a probable variation state? Depending on whether the time is short or normal, a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 11B is selected to determine the variation pattern of the shortening variation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is a short-time state or a probable variation state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  12A and 12B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 12B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 12B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 7, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), and the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning time determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 24), the game control microcomputer 560 determines in which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the starting prize. judge. Then, a value for specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning, and control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize the variation pattern type when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value based on the winning determination result designation command. At the same time, it can be recognized whether or not the display result is a big hit.

  16 to 19 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the winning determination result designation command. As shown in FIGS. 16 to 19, in this embodiment, in which gaming state the winning determination is made at which of the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is made. EXT data depending on whether there is a display result of the special symbol or production symbol, and whether the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Is set, and a winning determination result designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a normal state and is out of place at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether the value is 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 1 designation command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the winning determination result 1 designation command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 2 designation command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 3 designation command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 4 designation command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 5 designation command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 6 designation command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 7 designation command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 8 designation command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the winning determination result 8 designation command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state / short time state and out of place at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type determination random number is 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 receives a prize in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A time determination result 9 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). A winning determination result 10 designation command is transmitted.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the process of step S229 of the effect process at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is off, common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S224 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, in step S229 of a winning effect process described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 11 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 12 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0C (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 13 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a winning big hit is made at the time of starting winning the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “0D (H)” is set in the EXT data. The determination result 14 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0E (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 15 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0F (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 16 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big hit when the first winning prize opening 13 is won, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1-100. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 17 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2). A winning determination result 18 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small win is made at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 19 designation command in which “12 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a normal state and deviates from the start winning prize to the second start winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the random number value is 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 31 designation command in which “20 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the winning determination result 31 designation command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 32 designation command in which “21 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 33 designation command in which “22 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 34 designation command in which “23 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 35 designation command in which “24 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 36 designation command in which “25 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is from 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 37 designation command in which “26 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 38 designation command in which “27 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the winning determination result 38 designation command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state / short time state and out of place at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type determination random number is 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 receives a winning in which “28 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A time determination result 39 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “29 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). A winning determination result 40 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.74. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 receives a winning when “2A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 41 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 42 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2C (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 43 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds will be a big win at the time of starting winning the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.38. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “2D (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 44 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2E (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 45 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2F (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 46 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly becomes a big hit at the time of starting winning the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1-100. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “30 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 47 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “31 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2). A winning determination result 48 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small win is made at the time of starting winning the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 49 designation command in which “32 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1 and the super CA 2-7 variation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storage (see FIG. 11). Inconsistency does not occur between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 or the super CA 2-7 is selected, the variation display determined at the time of winning is won, and when the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 which is a super reach big hit is the winning pattern The continuous notice effect described later is executed on the determined change display. Only when it is determined that the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7, and super CA 3-3 variation pattern types are used, the winning determination result designation command shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 (specifically, at the time of winning) Determination result 1 designation, winning judgment result 8 designation, winning judgment result 13 designation, winning judgment result 16 designation, winning judgment result 31 designation, winning judgment result 38 designation, winning judgment result 43 designation, and winning prize The determination result 46 designation command only) may be transmitted, and in the case of other winning determination results, the winning determination result specifying command may not be transmitted. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning if it is other than the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a winning time determination result designation command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified is transmitted. It may be.

  Note that the “continuous notice effect” is a notice effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. However, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect is performed only once in the variable display before the start of the variable display subject to the notice effect. There may be. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. Further, it is not always necessary to continuously execute the display over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time.

  In this embodiment, the determination result at the time of winning including the MODE data “95 (H)” common to the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13 and the starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is designated. Although the command is transmitted, even if the MODE data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning is different between the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14. Good. For example, at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13, a winning result designation command including MODE data “95 (H)” is transmitted, and at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14, MODE data “ 96 (H) "may be transmitted as a winning result designation command. In this case, regardless of whether it is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14, which game state is displayed, a special symbol or an effect symbol is displayed. Winning determination result designation command including common EXT data, depending on which display result is the result and whether the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is determined to be in the range of the determination value at the start winning May be transmitted.

  Note that the command format of the winning determination result designation command is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, depending on whether the winning result is a big hit, whether it is a big hit, whether it is a big hit type determination result, or a variation pattern type determination result. Different commands may be transmitted. In this case, for example, a symbol designating command for designating whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a big hit, and a judgment result of the big hit type is sent, and separately, a variation that designates the judgment result of the variation pattern type You may comprise so that a category command may be transmitted.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden start of sudden probability change big hit when it is a sudden chance big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command for small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that the jackpot game is normally a big jackpot (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). is there. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state (not including the probability variation state). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories is increased or decreased is transmitted for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may make it transmit the production control command which designates itself. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 has been won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. You may make it transmit a common production | presentation control command by 1 reserved memory number and 2nd reserved memory number.

  Further, for example, separate presentation control commands (holding memory number designation commands) may be transmitted when the first holding memory number is designated and when the second holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  Also, for example, if the same first reserved memory number is specified, an effect control command specifying the addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and different EXT data. You may do it. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is made different, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted, and the second reserved memory number is determined. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  20 and 21 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 32), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 22 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold port number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212A) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 23) (step S214A). . In the process of step S214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 23, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time-short flag indicating that the gaming state is a time-short state (including a probability change state) is set (step S215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S218A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S218A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 executes a winning presentation process for preliminarily determining the variation display result when the variation based on the detected starting winning is executed at the time of starting winning (step S217A). ). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 and, at the same time, receives the winning determination result designation command based on the determination result of the winning effect processing. Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S218A).

  Note that if the winning effect process in step S217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S215A or step S216A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S218A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command is not performed. Note that if the winning effect process in step S217A is not executed, a command indicating that the winning determination has not been performed is transmitted, or a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified (for example, “FF (H) ”) may be transmitted as a winning determination result designation command set as EXT data.

  In this embodiment, when the process of step S215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, when the gaming state is the normal state (even if the probability change state is short state) If not, the winning effect process in step S217A is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S216A is executed, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S217A is performed only when the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is not established. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S217A only when the game state is a big hit game state, and the game process may be executed at step S217A when the game state is a small hit game state.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, a probability variation flag, which will be described later, is set and a time reduction flag is set. In the case of the time saving state, only the time saving flag is set (see steps S167, S170, S171 in FIG. 31). Therefore, in this embodiment, if it is confirmed whether or not the time reduction flag is set, it can be determined that the state is at least one of the probability changing state or the time reduction state. Therefore, in the process shown in step S215A, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the time-varying state or the time-shortening state is set by determining whether or not the time-shortening flag is set.

  In this embodiment, the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the big prize opening is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after notification that the big hit is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212B), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 23) (step S214B). . In the process of step S214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 and, at the same time, receives the prize determination result designation command based on the determination result of the prize effect process. Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S218B).

  Also in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S215A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process in step S217B may not be executed. Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S217B may not be executed if a big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). . With such a configuration, when the continuous notice effect is executed for a certain period, it is possible to reliably prevent the continuous notice effect from being interrupted due to a short variation time.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S217A and S217B. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S214A and S214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 9A. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls. By doing so, the variation pattern type is predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and, as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a big hit or Execute a continuous notice effect to announce that it will be super reach.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set. Confirmation (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S214A and S214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a probable big hit before, the normal state has changed to the probable state.) For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match.

  In the winning effect process, only the process of comparing the value of the random number for random determination (random R) with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state is executed, and it is not compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state. (Specifically, only the process of step S220 may be executed and the processes of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deviation from occurring between the jackpot determination result at the time of winning determination and the jackpot determination result at the actual start of variation.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S214A and S214B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S217A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22A). Is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. In addition, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning start effect process (see step S217B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22B), It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in 9 (C).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in Step S223), the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (Step S224). In this embodiment, in step S224, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state (specifically, whether or not a short time flag is set). It should be noted that a plurality of variation displays are executed after confirming whether or not the state of probability variation or time reduction is confirmed in step S224 at the time of starting winning, until the actual displaying of variation based on the starting winning is actually started. There is a possibility. For this reason, the game state has changed from the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S224 to determine whether or not the state is the probability change state or the short time state until the display of the actual variation based on the start winning is actually started (for example, If there is a probable big hit before the start of fluctuation, the normal state changes to the probable state.). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S224 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of step S224 (step S225). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the winning determination result designation command shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “28 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result specifying command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if it is a start winning prize at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “29 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79. If the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “20 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result specifying command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), “01 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning winning opening 13 is won. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “21 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), and if the first start winning opening 13 is a start winning prize, then “02 (H)” as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “22 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), and if the first winning prize opening 13 is a start winning prize, "03 (H)" as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “23 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), “04 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning winning opening 13 is won. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “24 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, if it is 200 to 214), if it is a start winning prize in the first start winning opening 13, it is “05 (H)” as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “25 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). Further, when the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), “06 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “26 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “27 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hit (step S226). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in step S 229 described later. If the first start winning opening 13 is a start winning prize, it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning, and the second starting winning opening 14 is started. For example, it is determined that “32 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “12 (H)” or “32 (H)” is set without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S214A and S214B. Is determined (step S227). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S217A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22A). Is determined using the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in FIG. 9D to determine whether the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “probable variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”. To do. In addition, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning start effect process (see step S217B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22B), The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown in FIG. 9 (E) is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, or “sudden probability big hit”.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S227 (step S228).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined that it is a normal big hit. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S229 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is won, and the second winning winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “2A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, if it is 75 to 149), if it is a start winning prize in the first start winning opening 13, "0B (H)" as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “2B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold is not less than 149 (that is, 150 to 251), “0C (H)” is set as EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is won. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “2C (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the probability variation big hit, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “0D (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning prize opening 13 is won, and the second winning prize opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “2D (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), “0E (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning in the case of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “2E (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold is not less than 79 (that is, 80 to 251), “0F (H)” is set as EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “2F (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19).

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 100 when it is suddenly determined that the probability variation big hit. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100. Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “30 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result specifying command (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “31 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S225, S226, and S228 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S214A and S214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it falls within the determination value range (step S229).

  In steps S225, S226, and S228, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 10 and 11) is set. In step S229, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the winning determination result designation command (step S230). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether the winning determination is made when the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is won, and which variation pattern type is determined in step S229. Depending on the game, any one of “00 (H)” to “12 (H)”, “20 (H)” to “32 (H)” as shown in FIGS. Processing to set the EXT data of the specified command is performed. When EXT data is set in step S230, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the winning determination result designation command in steps S218A and S218 in the first start port switch passing process or the second start port switch passing process is a pointer. And a winning determination result designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control command control process of step S28.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a winning determination result designation command indicating that a winning determination has been made may be transmitted when a big win or a small win is reached. Then, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute a continuous notice effect, which will be described later, based on the reception of a winning determination result designation command indicating that a winning determination is made when a big win is reached.

  25 and 26 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when the time variation flag indicating that the time reduction state is not set and the time reduction state is set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. Only when the state changes, the background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination that is extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 9) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 9A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 9A in the ROM 54 is set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state or the short-time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 9A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Reset at timing.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 9B and 9C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9C. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9E.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 10 (A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 10D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. It is reset when the display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S99.

  If the time flag is not set (N in Step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 11A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 11B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 11C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 11B is selected. The Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case of the probability variation state), the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 11C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 13). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. . In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the short time state (see FIG. 11C) and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages (FIG. 11B). ))) Is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), the shortened The fluctuation display of fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 11A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 12) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 13) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S99 and S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 11) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 11). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Also, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, depending on the total reserved memory number (may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to make a continuous notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 14) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Specifically, whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “02”. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command when the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is a sudden probability variation big hit can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “03”. Then, when neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit is obtained (that is, when it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S122 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S125). When the variable time timer times out (step S126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state and the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state if set (step S134). Control to send a big hit start designation command to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). .

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S137). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 2 times in the case of a sudden probable big hit) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S140). If the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S141). When the time reduction flag is set (that is, when the time change state is not controlled and only the time reduction state is controlled), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is- 1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S152).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted when it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent when it is a probable big hit, and a small hit / abrupt is sudden when it is a sudden probable big hit. Send a probable jackpot end designation command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit (step S166). Note that whether or not the probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit is, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02” to “03”. This can be determined by checking. If neither the probability change big hit nor the sudden probability change big hit is present (that is, if it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of time reductions (step S168). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  If the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S171). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  In this embodiment, the time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a win. If so, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In this embodiment, the time reduction flag is also used to determine whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state or a time reduction state in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 22 (see step S215A). ).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S173).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 14 and 15) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  35 to 39 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 0 (step S614A). If the value of the effect control process flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S615 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 0 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S801) (step S614B). In this embodiment, in the effect control process described later, the change time specified by the received change pattern command is measured, and the effect display device 9 displays the effect symbol change display. In this case, if the fluctuation time is mistakenly recognized, there will be a situation in which the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is continuously executed even though the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has ended. There is a fear. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the next variation pattern command is received when the processing is shifted to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process (for example, the process of effect design variation), the variation pattern is compulsorily changed. By controlling to shift to the command reception waiting process, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state where the effect is shifted so that the change display of the effect symbol is continuously executed even if the change display of the special symbol has already been finished does not occur. be able to. This also applies to other processes for forcibly shifting the process in the command analysis process (see steps S621A, S621B, S623A, S623B, S663B, and S663C). In addition, when controlling to forcibly shift the process in this way, control is performed so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol that has already been determined is stopped and displayed at the timing of the process transition. However, in the case of steps S621A, S621B, S623A, S623B (when a big hit start designation command is received during processing other than the big hit display processing), it is a time to shift to the big hit gaming state, and therefore the stop symbol of the effect symbol Without stopping the display, it is possible to proceed directly to the big hit display process and immediately start the fanfare effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  The effect control CPU 101 sets a continuous notice prohibition flag for prohibiting execution of a process for determining a continuous notice effect, which will be described later, and sets a continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer for measuring the prohibition period for a predetermined time ( For example, 32 ms) is set (step S616A). In other words, in this embodiment, even if the variation pattern command is received and the variation display of the production symbol is started, the determination of the continuous announcement production is prohibited until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses, and the continuous announcement production is performed. Not started. By controlling in such a manner, the continuous notice effect is not determined from the time when the change pattern command is received until at least the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received. This prevents a situation in which an unnatural production is produced due to a gap between the two.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is received after 4 ms from the reception of the variation pattern command, and the pending storage number subtraction designation command is received after the elapse of 4 ms, but the variation pattern command is received. If a start prize is received within 8 ms from when the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, and when the reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the continuous notice effect is executed based on the number of the reserved memory number that is increased by one. The number of times may be determined. For example, if the start winning is received after receiving the hold memory number subtraction designation command after starting the variable display in a state where there are two hold memory numbers, the production control CPU 101 receives the hold memory number addition designation command. Based on this, it is recognized that there are three pending storage numbers. If the continuous notice effect is determined in this state, a situation in which it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed over three variable displays is generated because the number of reserved memories is internally recognized as three. . However, after that, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received and the reserved memory number returns to the state of two, so that the continuous notice effect for three times is actually executed even though only two fluctuation displays are actually executed. As a result, there is a difference between the number of reserved memories and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if a variation pattern command is received, such a disadvantage is prevented by prohibiting the determination of the continuous notice effect until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) has elapsed. Yes.

  In this embodiment, 32 ms (for example, one frame from the start of the change of the production symbol is provided with a slight allowance between the time when the change pattern command is received and the time when the reserved memory count subtraction designation command is received. In this example, the time required for changing the design of the symbol is set in the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer, but the time required for receiving the reserved memory count subtraction command after receiving the change pattern command (8 ms) ) May be set in the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer.

  In this embodiment, a continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer is set, and the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer is timed out as described later, and the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset to prohibit the determination of the continuous notice effect. Although the state is to be released, the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset based on receipt of the reserved memory count subtraction designation command without using the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer, and the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited. You may make it cancel a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which control is performed so that execution of the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited until a predetermined period elapses after receiving the variation pattern command. However, the variation pattern command is received. Control may be performed to prohibit the execution of the continuous notice effect for the winning determination result indicated in the winning determination result designation command received until the predetermined period elapses.

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 sets a display result designation command reception flag (step S618A). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618B).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 4 (step S621A). ). If the value of the effect control process flag is 4, the process proceeds to step S622 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 4 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the jackpot display process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S621B). In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot start designation command is received when the process is shifted to a process other than the jackpot display process (for example, a process of changing the design symbol), the process forcibly shifts to the jackpot display process. By controlling in this way, the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural is prevented as much as possible. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the effect control process flag is 4 (step S623A). If the value of the effect control process flag is 4, the process proceeds to step S624 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 4 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the jackpot display process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S623B). In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot start designation command is received when the process is shifted to a process other than the jackpot display process (for example, a process of changing the design symbol), the process forcibly shifts to the jackpot display process. By controlling in this way, the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural is prevented as much as possible. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S658). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S659).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S661). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 18d according to the updated second reserved memory number (step S662).

  In steps S652, S653, S655, S656, S658, S659, S661, and S662, the reserved memory count and the reserved memory display are not immediately updated on the basis of receiving the command, but the reserved memory count addition designation is first performed. When the command is received, it may be confirmed whether or not the continuous notice prohibition flag is set. If the continuous notice prohibition flag is set, the addition of the reserved memory number and the reserved memory display may not be performed. In this case, when the reserved memory subtraction designation command is received thereafter, the reserved memory number is not subtracted or the reserved memory display is not performed, and the reserved memory number may be matched. By doing so, it is possible to reduce troublesome display in which the number of stored memories is turned on and off for a moment.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S663A). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 0 (step S663B). If the value of the effect control process flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S664 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 0 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S663C). In other words, in this embodiment, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received when the process is transitioned to a process other than the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (for example, a production symbol changing process), the fluctuation pattern is compulsorily changed. By controlling to shift to the command reception waiting process, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural. When the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the presentation does not change greatly based on the received command (for example, the variable display is not started or switched to the jackpot presentation). . Therefore, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the process may be forcibly shifted so as not to end the presentation (specifically, steps S663A and S663C may not be performed). .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the production control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even if the processing of step S665 is executed and the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state in which the addition or subtraction omission of the reserved memory number occurs and the erroneous reserved memory number is recognized, the reserved memory is stored. Can be reset to return to the normal state.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state (step S668). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the big hit number counter for counting the number of times that the big hit has occurred in the period of the probability changing state or the short time state (step S668A). Instead of executing the processing of step S668A each time a normal state background designation command is received and resetting the big hit counter, the normal state is first entered after the probability change state or the time reduction state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Only when a background designation command is received, the process of step S668A may be executed to reset the big hit counter.

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green display). Color background screen) (step S670). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S673), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen (for example, a red display). Color background screen) (step S674). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S675).

  Next, if the received effect control command is any prize determination result designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 determines the prize determination result according to the received prize determination result designation command. The result is stored in the result storage buffer (step S677). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a winning determination result designation command reception flag indicating that the winning determination result designation command has been received (step S678).

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an area for storing a winning determination result (winning determination result storage buffer). As shown in FIG. 40, in this embodiment, a first winning determination result storage buffer for storing a winning determination result at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, and a second starting winning opening 14 are stored. A second winning determination result storage buffer for storing a winning determination result at the time of starting winning is prepared. As shown in FIG. 40, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first winning determination result storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second winning determination result storage buffer. In this embodiment, the EXT data of the received winning determination result designation command is stored in the first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer. The first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer are formed in a RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S679). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the continuous notice prohibition flag is set (step S800A). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S800E as it is, and a continuous notice effect determining process for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode is executed. If the continuous notice prohibition flag is set, the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer (step S800B). Then, when the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer times out (step S800C), the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous notice prohibition flag (step S800D), and executes a continuous notice effect determination process (step S800E). On the other hand, if it has not timed out, it controls so that a continuous notice effect determination process is not performed.

  By executing the processing of steps S800A to S800E, the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset when a predetermined period has elapsed since the change pattern command was received, and the prohibition state for determining the continuous notice effect is canceled. Also, the continuous notice effect determination process is executed only when it is not the prohibition period of the continuous notice determination (when the continuous notice prohibition flag is not set). In the production control microcomputer 100, for example, when the production control process is executed with a timer interruption every 33 ms, the variation pattern command is not measured without measuring the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer. If it is within the received interrupt (in this case, it is within 33 ms after receiving the variation pattern command and the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not yet been received), the presentation control process is once exited. The continuous notice effect may be determined in the effect control process executed at the next timer interruption after 33 ms. By doing so, the timer measurement process is not required, and the processing burden on the production control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. In the case of a small hit, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit after the end of the variation time. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the continuous notice effect determination process (step S800E). In the continuous notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the winning determination result designation command reception flag is set (step S6001). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the winning determination result designation command (step S6002), and executes a process for determining the continuous notice effect after step S6003. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a new start win occurs and the determination result designation command at the time of winning is received, based on the fact that the determination result designation command reception flag at the time of winning is set in step S6001, continuous notice is given. The production is decided. However, if the timing at which a new start prize is generated and the determination result designation command at the time of winning is a prohibition period for determining the continuous notice effect, wait until the prohibition period ends (see steps S800A to S800E). Based on the fact that the winning determination result designation command reception flag is set in step S6001, the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether any continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is already being executed is set (step S6003). The continuous advance notice execution flag is set in step S6020 described later. If any of the continuous notice execution flags is set, the processing is ended as it is. That is, when the continuous notice effect is already being executed, control is performed so that the determination process of the continuous notice effect is not repeated.

  If no continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all winning determination results stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (step S6004). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set. Then, if neither the probability variation state flag nor the short time state flag is set (that is, the normal state (low base state)), the effect control CPU 101 stores the winning prize stored in the first winning judgment result storage buffer. All the time determination results are extracted. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the second winning determination result storage buffer if the probability variation state flag or the short time state flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state or the short time state (high base state)). Extract all winning determination results. In this embodiment, all the winning determination results stored in the winning determination result storage buffer are extracted in step S6004, and all of the variable displays until the start of the variable display to be determined are “non-reach”. It is configured such that a continuous notice effect can be executed on the condition that it is “out of”. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous notice effect is impaired due to the reach effect interrupting during the continuous notice effect. That is, if the reach effect is executed during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuity of the continuous notice effect may be impaired and the effect of the continuous notice effect may not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, such a situation can be prevented by controlling so that the continuous notice effect may be executed on the condition that reach is not executed in each fluctuation display until the fluctuation display to be determined is started. it can.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the latest winning determination result among the extracted winning determination results is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”. Confirmation is made (step S6005). In this case, when both the probability variation state flag and the short time state flag are not set and the normal state is set, the effect control CPU 101 receives the winning time extracted from only the first winning time determination result storage buffer in step S6004. It is confirmed whether or not the latest winning determination result among the determination results is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”. Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the winning determination result extracted only from the second winning determination result storage buffer in step S6004 when the probability changing state flag or the short time state flag is set and the probability changing state or the short time state is set. It is checked whether or not the latest winning determination result is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines that the latest winning determination result is a determination result indicating “non-reach loss”, “super reach loss”, or “super reach big hit” (Y in step S6005). ), The process proceeds to step S6006. In other words, in this embodiment, when the processes of steps S6004 and S6005 are executed, there is a change display indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out”, or “super reach big hit”, step S6006. In subsequent processing, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that if there is a determination result of a big hit, not limited to “super reach big hit”, the process may proceed to step S6006 to determine the continuous notice effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of undecided winning determination results among the extracted winning determination results, not only the latest winning determination result, all of them are determined, and even one of them is “not reachable”, “ If there is a fluctuating display such as “Super-reaching out” or “Super-reaching big hit”, it may be determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the processing after Step S6006.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S6005 that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 for the latest extracted winning determination result (specifically, “00 (H) "or" 20 (H) "(see FIGS. 16 and 18), a value indicating that it becomes super CA2-7 (specifically," 07 (H) "or" 27 (H) ". 16 or 18), or a value indicating that it becomes super CA3-3 (specifically, “0C (H)”, “0F (H)”, “2C (H)” or “2F (H 17) (refer to FIG. 17 and FIG. 19). Check whether or not ).

  When the determination result at the time of winning is any one of “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability change state flag is set. (Step S6006). If the probability change state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table B as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6007). The continuous notice allocation table will be described later (see FIGS. 45 and 46).

  If the probability variation state flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S6008). If the time-short state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the value of the number-of-times-after-count counter is 92-100 (that is, during the execution of the 92-100th variable display after the shift to the time-short state). (If it is a case where the start winning is awarded and the variable display is executed) (step S6009). In this case, specifically, the effect control CPU 101 should not have a value of the time-shortening counter value of 100 or more in the time-shortening state. What is necessary is just to determine whether it is above. If the value of the number-of-times-after-counter counter is not 92 to 100, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the power failure recovery flag is set (step S6010). In step S6009, when the value of the number of times after time reduction is 92 to 100 or when the power failure recovery flag is set in step S6010, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether there is a continuous notice effect and the effect of the continuous notice effect. The continuous notice allocation table D is selected as a table for determining the mode (step S6011). If the power failure recovery flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table C as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S6012).

  If the time-short state flag is not set (that is, in the normal state), the production control CPU 101 determines that the value of the time-short time counter is 101 to 108 (that is, the 101st to 108th time after the shift to the time-short state). (If it is a case where the start-up prize is won and the variable display is executed while the variable display is executed) (step S6013). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 may specifically determine whether or not the value of the after-time-count counter is 101 or more. If the value of the number of times after time reduction is not 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice distribution table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step) S6014). If the value of the number of times after time reduction is 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table E as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step) S6015).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect using the continuous notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6016).

  Note that the continuous notice determination process in step S6016 is executed on the condition that no continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6003. That is, in this embodiment, the effect notice determination process is executed on condition that the continuous notice effect is not currently being executed. Since the continuous notice execution flag is already set after the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the continuous notice determination process again.

  In addition, if a super-reach or a winning prize that is a big hit occurs while running a continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning a “non-reach”, the super-reach is switched from the continuous notice effect that is being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the continuous notice determination table. As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, different continuous notice determination tables are prepared according to the number of reserved memories and the gaming state. Among these, FIG. 44A shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 4 used in the normal state. FIG. 44 (B) shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 3 used in the normal state. FIG. 44 (C) shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 2 used in the normal state. Further, FIG. 44 (D) shows a continuous notice determination table for probability change / time reduction used in the probability change state or the time reduction state.

  In step S6016, the effect control CPU 101 executes the change display of the first special symbol (for example, when neither the probability change state flag nor the time-short state flag is set and is in the normal state). The first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (see steps S652 and S658) is specified. In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (for example, when the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set and the probability change state or the time reduction state is set), the effect control CPU 101 performs the second hold. The second reserved storage number (see steps S655 and S661) stored in the storage number storage area is specified. Then, if the specified reserved memory count is 4, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the reserved memory count 4 shown in FIG. Further, if the specified number of reserved memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 3 shown in FIG. Further, if the specified number of reserved memories is 2, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 2 shown in FIG. Furthermore, if the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the probability change / time reduction continuous notice determination table shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is less than 2, it is impossible to execute a continuous notice effect over a plurality of fluctuations, so control is performed so that it is not determined to execute a continuous notice effect. In this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is ended in the variable display up to the previous variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect, but the continuous notice effect is also displayed in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect. In the case where it is configured to execute, the continuous notice effect can be executed over at least two fluctuations, and therefore it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed even if the number of reserved memories is only one. Thus, what is necessary is just to be able to execute a notice effect that is continuous over a plurality of fluctuations at least twice. Further, when the continuous notice effect is configured to be executed even in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect, it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed even if the number of reserved memories is 0, and the substantially continuous effect is Although it cannot be executed, a continuous notice effect (however, in this case, only one effect) may be executed in the variable display to be noticed.

  In step S6016, the effect control CPU 101 first extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes the continuous notice effect by determining whether or not the extracted value of the continuous notice determination random number matches the determination value included in the selected continuous notice determination table. Decide whether or not. As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the ratio of the determination value is set to increase as the number of reserved memories increases, and the continuous notice effect is performed with a higher probability as the number of reserved memories increases. Decide to run.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), when the probability variation state or the short time state is set, the ratio of the determination value is set to be small, and when the probability variation state or the short time state is established. The ratio of the decision to execute the continuous notice effect is low. It should be noted that control may be performed so as not to determine that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the case of the probability change state or the short time state.

  In this embodiment, the case where the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect is determined according to whether or not the game state is the probability change state or the short time state is shown, but the method for determining the continuous notice effect according to the game state is shown. Is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, depending on whether or not it is controlled to a low-probability high-base state that is easy to win, although it is a low-probability state where the probability of a big hit is not increased, the presence or absence of the continuous notice effect is determined. Also good. Conversely, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is determined depending on whether or not it is controlled to a high-probability low-base state in which it is difficult to win a start even though it is a high-probability state with an increased probability of winning a big hit You may make it do. In this case, for example, when the low probability high base state or the high probability low base state is controlled, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is not executed. Further, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect may be determined depending on whether or not an error notification of the big prize opening error is being performed. It should be noted that the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined depending on whether other error notifications such as a full tank error are being performed, not only the big prize opening error.

  Further, as a method for determining the continuous notice effect based on the gaming state, whether to execute the continuous notice effect based on whether or not a new command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 may be determined. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined in step S6016 to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6017). If it is decided not to execute the continuous notice effect, the process is terminated as it is.

  If it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice effect mode for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6018). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines which of the determination values included in the continuous notice distribution table selected in steps S6007, S6011, S6012, S6014, and S6015 the extracted random number for determining the continuous notice effect mode. Is determined to determine the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6019).

  45 and 46 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the continuous notice distribution table showing distribution of continuous notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state and the value of the after-short-count counter is not 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice distribution table in the normal state shown in FIG. 45A selected in step S6014. Using A, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table A is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (A), a continuous notice effect is produced in an effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode shift”. Decide on. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any one of the effect modes of “change in variation mode”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), the result is shown in FIG. 45 (A). As described above, it is determined to execute a continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in change pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  Further, when using the continuous notice allocation table A, for example, the production control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by a winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (A), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), the result shown in FIG. As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  Note that the specific contents of the presentation modes of the respective continuous notice effects of “change in change mode at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown”, and “change in reserved ball” will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a probable change state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table B in the probable change state shown in FIG. 45B selected in step S6007 to determine the received winning time. Based on the winning determination result indicated by the result designation command, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (B), there is no allocation to the continuous notice effects in any of the production modes, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), the result is shown in FIG. 45 (B). As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  Further, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (B), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any of the effect modes of “change in variation form”, “countdown”, or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 45 (B). As described above, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in variation form at the time of symbol change”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the value of the number-of-hours counter is not 92 to 100 (that is, even if a start winning is made while the first to 91st variation display is executed after transition to the short-time state) The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table C shown in FIG. 45C selected in step S6012, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table C is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by a winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (C), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 45 (C). As described above, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  Further, when the continuous notice allocation table C is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 by the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (C), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and that no continuous notice is executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any of the effect modes of “change in variation form”, “countdown”, or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 45 (C). As described above, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in variation form at the time of symbol change”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the value of the number-of-short-time counter is 92 to 100 (that is, even if the start winning is performed while the 92 to 100th variation display is executed after transition to the short time state) The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 46 (D) selected in step S6011, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the power failure recovery flag is set (that is, a power failure occurs when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state, then power supply to the gaming machine resumes In this case, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 46D selected in step S6011, and determines the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. Based on the above, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table D is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 46 (D), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is determined (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), the result is shown in FIG. 46 (D). As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  When the continuous notice allocation table D is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 with a winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 46 (D), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), the result is shown in FIG. 46 (D). Thus, it determines to perform the continuous notice effect of the production | generation aspect of "holding ball change".

  The continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 46 (D) is used when the game state is the short-time state but the remaining number of the short-time state is within eight times (until eight times of variable display is executed). The time-shortening state ends during this period. In this embodiment, since the total number of stored reserves can be stored up to 8 (that is, up to 8 total start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 can be held), When the remaining number of time-saving states is within 8 times, the game state is in the time-saving state when determining the winning time, but the time-saving state is already in effect when the variable display subject to the winning-time determination is started. May have ended. Therefore, there is a possibility that the determination result at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual variation cannot be matched, and the continuous notice effect cannot be appropriately performed. For example, if a value of “220 to 229” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern for deviation shown in FIG. 11C is based on the fact that the time is short when winning is determined. In spite of determining that the super reach is lost (super CA 2-7) using the type determination table 135C, the state is changed to the normal state when the variable display is actually started. (As shown in (A) and (B), normal CA2-5 and normal CA2-6 are determined), there is a possibility that the determination result at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual variation cannot be matched. . Further, when a value of “90 to 219” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern for deviation shown in FIG. 11C is based on the fact that the time is short when winning is determined. In spite of determining non-reach out (non-reach CA2-3) using the type determination table 135C, when the variable display is actually started, the normal state is entered, so that a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream Normal reach may be executed (as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, it may be determined as non-reach CA2-2 or normal CA2-4 to CA2-6), and the determination result at the time of winning May not be consistent with the actual decision result at the start of change. As a result, the percentage that the change display subject to the determination at the time of winning the prize does not become a big hit or super reach becomes high, which may impair the player's expectation. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), when the game state is the short-time state but the remaining number of the short-time state is within 8 times, The execution of the continuous notice effect is restricted so that only the continuous notice effect is performed, thereby preventing a situation that impairs the player's expectation.

  The continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 46 (D) is also used when the gaming state is a short time state and the power failure recovery flag is set. In this embodiment, as described above, the RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by the backup power source, and the value of the time counter number counter is not stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and the power supply is resumed, when any winning determination result command is received, the effect control CPU 101 displays the change display after shifting to the time-saving state. It is not possible to correctly determine how many times it has been executed. Therefore, if power failure recovery is performed when the remaining number of time-saving states is 8 or less, there is a possibility that the result of determination at the time of winning is not consistent with the result of determination at the start of actual fluctuation. There is a risk that the player's expectation will be impaired. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), even when the game state is the short-time state and the power failure is restored, only the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “pending ball change” is performed. In order to prevent this, the execution of the continuous notice effect is regulated to prevent a situation in which the player's expectation is impaired.

  Also, if the current gaming state is the normal state and the value of the after-short-time counter is 101 to 108 (that is, even if a start winning is made while the 101st to 108th variation display is executed after shifting to the short time state). The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table E shown in FIG. 46 (E) selected in step S6015, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table E is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 46 (E), there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), the result shown in FIG. Thus, it determines to perform the continuous notice effect of the production | generation aspect of "holding ball change".

  Further, when using the continuous notice allocation table E, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 with the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 46 (E), it is determined that there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), the result is shown in FIG. 46 (E). As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  The continuous notice allocation table E shown in FIG. 46 (E) is used when the number of variable displays executed after the time-short state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state is still within eight times. It is. In this embodiment, since the total number of stored reserves can be stored up to 8 (that is, up to 8 total start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 can be held), If the number of executions of the variable display is still within 8 even after the time-short state is ended, the game state is normally set when the variable display is started with respect to the reserved memory that has been held in the starting prize and held before that. Although it is in the state, there is a possibility that the gaming state is still in the short time state when the winning determination is made. For this reason, there is a possibility that the result of determination at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual fluctuation cannot be matched, and the continuous notice effect cannot be properly performed for the stored memory that has been won by starting before the time saving state is finished. For example, when the value of “90 to 219” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the determination at the time of winning is made for the holding storage that has been won before starting the time reduction state, In spite of having been determined to be non-reach deviation (non-reach CA2-3) using the variation pattern type determination table 135 for probability variation / shortening deviation shown in FIG. Since the transition to the normal state is started, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or normal reach may be executed (as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, non-reach CA2-2 or normal reach). CA2-4 to CA2-6 may be determined). Then, for example, in the case of configuring so that the continuous notice effect is executed on the condition that all the change indications are “non-reach” before the determination target (the subject of the continuous notice effect) is changed. When it is just after the short-time end, it is determined that all the winning judgment results are “non-reach” and the continuous notice effect is started. There is a possibility that the situation in which the fluctuation is interrupted occurs, the continuity of the continuous announcement effect is impaired, and the player's sense of expectation may be impaired. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), when the game state is the normal state but the number of executions of the variable display after the completion of the time reduction state is still within eight times, The execution of the continuous notice effect is regulated so that only the continuous notice effect of the “change” effect mode is performed, thereby preventing a situation in which the player's expectation is impaired.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 45A to 45C, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode has a determination result at the time of winning “super-reaching loss” or “super-reach big hit”. Is selected only if Therefore, when the continuous notice effect is executed in the “countdown” effect mode, it is determined that the super reach effect is performed at least in the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, and the interest for the game is improved. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 46D and 46E, in the continuous notice allocation tables D and E, no assignment is made to “countdown” which is an effect mode in which super reach is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the short-time state but the remaining number of short-time state is within eight times, or when the gaming state is in the short-time state and the power failure is restored, If the number of executions of the variable display after the completion of the short-time state is still within eight times, the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is restricted from being selected. By doing so, the super-reach effect is not executed in the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, even though the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode of the super reach determination is executed The situation that seriously impairs the player's expectation is prevented.

  In addition, when it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no distribution in the continuous notice distribution tables A to E, control is performed so as not to execute the processes of steps S6020 and S6021 described later.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice distribution table for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect are configured as separate tables. Although the case is shown, the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode are determined by one determination process using one table in which the presence / absence and the appearance mode of the continuous notice effect are associated with each other. Also good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being executed according to the effect mode determined in step S6019 (step S6020). In this case, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 1 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning is “non-reach”, a first off-preliminary continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 8 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning prize is “super-reaching”, the first reach continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 13 designation command or the winning determination result 16 designation command shown in FIG. When a “super reach big hit” is made for the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, a first big hit continuous advance notice execution flag indicating that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. . Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 31 designation command shown in FIG. When the start winning is “non-reach”, a second off-continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 38 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning prize is “super reach loss”, a second reach continuous notice execution flag indicating that execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 43 designation command or the winning determination result 46 designation command shown in FIG. When a “super reach big hit” is made for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, a second big hit continuous notice execution flag is set indicating that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning. . Among these continuous notice execution flags, the first missed continuous notice execution flag, the first reach continuous notice execution flag, and the first big hit continuous notice execution flag are the first continuous notice execution flags. . Of these continuous advance notice execution flags, the second outlier continuous advance notice execution flag, the second reach continuous advance notice execution flag, and the second big hit continuous advance notice execution flag are second continuous advance notice execution flags. .

  In step S6020, a continuous notice execution flag is set, and information that can specify the effect mode determined in step S6019 is set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the effect mode is “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, a flag indicating “mode shift”, a flag indicating “countdown”, “holding ball” A flag indicating “change” may be set. Also, for example, when the continuous notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which effect mode is set in a predetermined bit of the continuous notice execution flag. By which, it may be possible to specify which production mode is determined.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current reserved memory number in the variation counter (step S6021). In this case, when the first continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6020, the production control CPU 101 sets the first reserved storage number in the variation counter. If the second continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6020, the second reserved storage number is set in the variation counter. Note that the variation count counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed before the variation display for which the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed during the change display of the effect symbol and the change counter is set in step S6021, the change display during the execution is ended first. Sometimes the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S876), and as a result, the value of the variation counter becomes 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the continuous notice effect Ends. In step S6021, when the variation of the effect symbol is not being displayed, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current reserved storage number in the variation counter. If configured in this way, the continuous notice effect can be ended until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning is determined. It is possible to prevent both the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect from being performed in order to make the effect unduly unnatural.

  In the continuous notice allocation table shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the allocation may be performed so that the selection ratio of each effect mode varies depending on the reliability that is a big hit. For example, each presentation mode may be allocated so that the reliability of the big hit becomes higher in the order of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, “change in reserved ball”. . In addition, the allocation method of each production mode that increases the reliability that is a big hit is not limited to such an order, for example, in the reverse order “change in reserved ball”, “countdown”, “mode shift”, “symbol change” Allocation may be performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit becomes higher in the order of “change in the fluctuation pattern of time”. Furthermore, not only in the order of these arrangements, for example, the “mode transition” and “countdown” effects are assigned in the order of arrangement in which the reliability with the biggest jackpot is high, or conversely, the reliability with the biggest jackpot is low. And various ways of allocating the production modes are possible.

  In this embodiment, the following prohibition process is performed for the continuous notice effect.

(1) If the game machine is a big hit when the power is turned on or the power is restored, the gaming state after the big hit game is indeterminate. Therefore, in such a case, control is performed so as to clear all the information on the current reserved memory number. In addition, it is configured not to clear the information on the number of reserved memory itself, but to clear information related to the reserved memory (for example, a winning determination result (determination result at the start winning prize) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer). May be.

(2) When there is a new start winning at the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 during the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game is uncertain. Therefore, control is performed so as not to perform the process of executing the continuous notice effect for such a start winning prize (see step S216A). Also, control is performed so as not to stack the variation information of the number of reserved storage.

(3) In the case of a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, or a high probability state due to sudden probability variation big hit, a winning determination result designation command for determining a winning for the first winning winning opening 13 Is controlled so as not to be transmitted (see step S215A). In this case, even if the production control microcomputer 100 does not receive the winning determination result designation command, for example, the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is used. The first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer (see FIG. 40) based on the reserved storage number specified by the second reserved memory number addition designation command and the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command. It is sufficient to always specify to which storage area the storage area is in a state of having a reserved storage. When a new winning determination result specifying command is received, the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command may be stored in the storage area of the specified winning determination result storage buffer. Further, a command indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is transmitted to the probability change state or the short time state, and information indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is received based on the received command. The time determination result storage buffer or the second winning time determination result storage buffer may be stored in a corresponding storage area.

(4) When changing from the 92nd time to the 100th time after the transition to the short-time state, the remaining state is small until the end of the short-time state, and the gaming state and the actual state at the time of winning determination are determined by the timing of transition from the short-time state to the normal state There is a possibility that the game state at the time of change may not match. Therefore, even in the same short time state, when changing from the 92nd time to the 100th time, using a continuous notice allocation table different from the case of changing from the 1st time to the 91st time, Control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “ball change” is executed (see FIG. 46).

(5) Further, even when the power saving state is in the time-saving state, the same as (4) can be said because the remaining number of time-saving states is uncertain. For this reason, by using a continuous notice allocation table similar to the case of performing the change from the 92nd to the 100th time, control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “holding ball change” is executed.

(6) Further, when a start prize is received within an extremely short predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) after the start of the variable display, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is not performed for the start prize (step in FIG. 35). S616A and steps S800A to S800E of FIG. 41).

(7) In addition, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect based on the non-reach losing and the determination at the time of winning is not continuously executed for a predetermined period. For example, when the continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach and the winning is finished, the next continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach and the winning until the variation display is finished 20 times or more thereafter. Control not to execute.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is recovered (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts illustrating the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the continuous notice interrupting flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being interrupted is set (step S8001). Note that the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8004 described later. If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. It is confirmed whether or not the first continuous notice execution flag is set (step S8002). The first continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6020 of the continuous notice effect determination process. If any of the first continuous notice execution flags is set (Y in step S8002), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S8003). ). If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8013. If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 sets the continuous notice interruption flag (step S8004). In addition, a winning determination result designation command (a winning determination result 31 designation command to a winning determination result 49 designation command; see FIG. 18 and FIG. 19) transmitted when a winning is won at the second starting prize opening 14 is received. On the basis of this, the continuous notice interruption flag may be set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S8002 to S8004, the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13. When the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect.

  If the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S8005). If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the variation display of the first special symbol is returned), the continuous notice interruption flag is reset. (Step S8006). Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the set first continuous notice execution flag is the first off-line continuous notice execution flag of the first continuous notice execution flags (step S8007). ). The first off-running continuous notice execution flag indicates that a continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 becomes “non-reach out”. And is set as one of the first continuous notice execution flags in step S6020 of the continuous notice effect determination process. When the first deviation continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first deviation continuous notice execution flag (step S8008).

  On the other hand, if the flag for executing the first missed continuous advance notice is not set in step S8007 (in this case, if the start win to the first start winning opening 13 is “super reach miss” or “super reach big hit”, the prize is won. Based on the time determination, the first reach continuous notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous notice execution flag is set), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8013.

  As described above, when the processing of steps S8005 to S8008 is executed, the second special symbol variation display interrupts and the continuous notice effect is interrupted, and then the first special symbol variation display is restored. When the variation subject to time determination is “non-reach”, the continuous notice effect is ended without continuing the continuous notice effect. In addition, if the variation subject to determination at the time of winning is “Super reach out” or “Super reach jackpot”, after the display returns to the variation display of the first special symbol, the remaining continuous notice effect continues. Executed. With such a configuration, when returning to the continuous notice effect after the change display of the second special symbol has interrupted, at least super reach will be determined, and a big hit will be given to the player after super reach. Expectation can be raised.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8013). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S8013 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8014). In other words, the processing of step S8014 is executed by the production control CPU 101, so that the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop of the production symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 does not reach the chance symbol symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream. The combination of the big hit symbol of the object and the symbol in which one symbol is shifted) is also determined. In addition, when it is determined that the production control CPU 101 executes the continuous production of the production mode of “change in the variation pattern at the time of design fluctuation”, the so-called chance symbol design (for example, “ A combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. A combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are even-numbered symbols (a stop symbol that usually reminds of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the production control CPU 101 uses odd symbols (probability variation) as 3 symbols as stop symbols. The combination of effect symbols arranged in a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. And in the case of detachment (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols (reach symbols) in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. When the received display result designation command suddenly shows a probable big hit or small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control Determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as stop symbols. If a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with reach is received in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the stop symbol “135” is determined and the reach symbol is also determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 101 determines that the winning symbol is a stop symbol by specifying that it is a big hit, disappointment, suddenly probable big hit or small hit based on the variation pattern command, not the display result designation command. It may be. For example, when the variation control command for big hit is received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol with the same symbols on the left and right sides, and suddenly receives a variation pattern command for a probable big hit / small hit. Determines a stop symbol such as “135”, and when a variation pattern command for deviation is received, a symbol other than these may be determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S8015). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display a notice effect (a notice effect other than the continuous notice effect. For example, an operation notice effect (stick described later) (A notice effect accompanied by a player's operation by the controller 122) or a step-up notice effect, a motif display notice effect, a group notice effect, a button notice effect, a mini character notice effect, etc.) is determined. The notice effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8016). If the continuous notice interrupting flag is set (Y in step S8015), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8017 without executing step S8016.

  In this embodiment, the continuous notice interruption flag is set because the second special symbol is displayed during execution of the continuous notice effect based on the result of determination at the time of winning for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. Is interrupted and the continuous notice effect is interrupted. Therefore, when the process of step S8015 is executed and the change display of the second special symbol is executed while interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect, the effect display device 9 is displayed during the change display of the second special symbol. Is controlled so as not to execute a notice effect other than a continuous notice effect. For example, an operation notice effect, a step-up notice effect, or a mini character notice effect. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed while interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect, as a result, neither the notice result of the continuous notice nor the notice effect other than the continuous notice effect is executed.

  Note that the continuous notice effect is set based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, whereas the notice effect setting process in step S8016 sets the notice effect for the variation started this time. Even if executed together with the notice effect, the effects are not necessarily bothered and duplicated. Therefore, regardless of whether the continuous notice effect is being executed or whether the continuous notice effect is being interrupted, the notice effect setting process in step S8016 is always executed, and the determination process in step S8015 is performed. It may be unnecessary. Therefore, for example, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the notice effect is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. It may be.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect when the change pattern and the notice effect are executed (step S8017). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8018).

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table (step S8019). The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 51 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and notice effect. If it is determined in step S8016 to execute the notice effect, the data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not determined to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected. In addition, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed and the continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the continuous notice effect in step S8017.

  Also, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, pseudo-stops, and temporary stop symbols in the sliding effect. May be.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8020). Further, the production control CPU 101 deletes the first winning determination result (the winning determination result corresponding to the variable display executed this time) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the winning determination result storage buffer stores the winning determination result storage buffer. The contents are shifted (step S8021). In this case, the production control CPU 101 executes the production symbol variation display in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol (specifically, when the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set). In this case, the first winning determination result stored in the first winning determination result storage buffer is deleted, and the contents of the first winning determination result storage buffer are shifted. In addition, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), at the time of the second winning The first winning determination result stored in the determination result storage buffer is deleted, and the contents of the second winning determination result storage buffer are shifted.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8022).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the notice effect setting processing in step S8016. Note that FIG. 52 shows a flow of processing for setting an operation advance notice effect among various notice effects that are executed during the effect symbol variation display. If other notice effects (for example, step-up notice effect, motif display notice effect, group notice effect, button notice effect, mini character notice effect, etc.) can be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol, the effect The control CPU 101 also performs processing for setting the notice effects in the notice effect setting process.

  The “operation advance notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed during the change display of the effect symbol, and uses a predetermined effect device to notify the player that the predetermined game state is to be achieved. It is a notice effect with operation. Further, the operation advance notice effect notifies, for example, as a “predetermined gaming state”, a big hit or a super reach (may be a normal reach). Further, in this embodiment, when the operation advance notice effect is executed, the effect display device 9 is used as the “predetermined effect device”, but the frame LED 28 is used as the “predetermined effect device”. Alternatively, an operation notice effect may be executed using the speaker 27.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an operation advance notice effect is executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated for a predetermined vibration time. The “predetermined vibration time” is the time for which the stick controller 122 is vibrated during the operation notice effect execution period, and the player operates the stick controller 122 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, in the foreground). This is a time during which an operation to tilt in the direction is accepted as an effective operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, a predetermined gaming state (big hit or super reach) is set on condition that an operation of the stick controller 122 in a predetermined direction is detected within a predetermined vibration time during execution of the operation announcement effect. An effect is announced in advance of the possibility. On the other hand, even if the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction, if it is not within a predetermined vibration time, an effect of notifying the possibility of a predetermined gaming state (big hit or super reach) is not performed. For example, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Oh! In this embodiment, 5 seconds, 3 seconds, or 1 second may be determined as the predetermined vibration time.

  In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (step S1501). Whether or not a command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that the command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern has been received (Y in step S1501), the effect control CPU 101 determines the jackpot operation notice as a table for determining whether or not to execute the action notice effect. A table is selected (step S1502). Then, control goes to a step S1505.

  If the variation pattern is not a big hit (N in Step S1501), the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach deviation is received as the variation pattern command (Step S1503). . Whether or not a command corresponding to a fluctuation pattern of super-reaching has been received is determined based on, for example, data stored in a fluctuation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the super-reach deviation has been received (Y in step S1503), the effect control CPU 101 uses the reach-relief table as a table for determining whether or not to execute the operation advance notice effect. An operation advance notice determination table is selected (step S1504). Then, control goes to a step S1505. If the fluctuation pattern is not a super-reach shift pattern (N in step S1503), the process is terminated as it is without executing the processes in and after step S1505.

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S1501 to S1504 is executed, and at least when the super reach occurs, the process after step S1505 is executed and the operation announcement effect is determined to be executed. There is a case to be. The reason for configuring in this way is to ensure a sufficient execution period of the operation announcement effect during the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, for example, if the operation advance notice effect is executed during a change display with a short change time such as a shortened change or a normal change, the effect may be unnatural, for example, the operation advance notice effect may be interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operation advance notice effect can be executed only when the change display time is relatively long (20 seconds or more in this embodiment) and the change notice with super reach is performed. To ensure a sufficient execution period.

  Note that the method of securing the execution period of the operation preview effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and for example, if it has a variation time longer than the time required to execute the operation preview effect Even when the normal reach variation pattern or the normal variation variation pattern is used, the operation announcement effect may be executed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a case in which a crane game is performed as an operation advance notice effect will be described. However, the effect aspect of the operation advance notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. Further, for example, when executing a hidden command-like notice effect that does not require a very long execution period as the operation notice effect, it is not necessary to perform the prohibition processing as in steps S1501 to S1504, and a shortening variation or a normal variation. For example, the operation notice effect may be executed even during the fluctuation display with a short fluctuation time.

  In step S1505, the effect control CPU 101 uses the operation advance notice determination table selected in steps S1502 and S1504 to perform a lottery process based on a random number for determining whether to execute the operation advance notice effect, and executes the operation advance notice effect. Determine whether or not. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the operation advance notice determination table. Among these, FIG. 53 (A) is a jackpot operation advance notice determination table selected in step S1502. FIG. 53B is an operation advance notice determination table for detachment that is selected in step S1504. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, in the operation announcement determination table, the operation announcement effect is executed at a higher rate in the case of a big hit than in the case where the super reach is lost. A value has been allocated. Note that the method of allocating the judgment value in each operation advance notice determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the operation advance notice effect is executed when the big hit and the super reach are off. Determination values may be assigned so that the ratios are the same.

  Next, when it is determined to execute the operation advance notice effect (Y in step S1506), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the big hit change pattern has been received as the change pattern command ( Step S1507). Whether or not a command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area. When it is determined that the command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern has been received (Y in step S1507), the effect control CPU 101 determines the vibration time of the stick controller 122 during the operation preview effect and the type of the operation preview effect. A table for determining the big hit vibration time / notice type determination is selected as a table for performing (step S1508). Then, control goes to a step S1510.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern is not a big hit (that is, when the super reach is off), the effect control CPU 101 determines the vibration time of the stick controller 122 during the operation preview effect and the type of the operation preview effect. As a table for this, a vibration time / notice type determination table for reach deviation is selected (step S1509). Then, control goes to a step S1510.

  In step S1510, the effect control CPU 101 uses the vibration time / notice type determination table selected in steps S1508 and S1509 to determine the vibration time of the stick controller 122 during the operation notice effect and the type of operation notice effect. The lottery process based on the random number is performed, and the vibration time of the stick controller 122 and the type of the operation notice effect are determined. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the vibration time / notice type determination table. Among these, FIG. 54A is a big hit vibration time / notice type determination table selected in step S1508. FIG. 54B is a reach / vibration type determination table for reach deviation selected in step S1509. As shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, either 5 seconds, 3 seconds or 1 second is determined as the vibration time of the stick controller 122, and the type of the operation announcement effect is the announcement A, the announcement B or the announcement C. Either is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the notice A is determined as the type of the operation notice effect, “Super Hot!” Or the like is provided on the condition that the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within the vibration time. An effect of displaying a character string is performed. Further, when the notice B is determined as the type of the operation notice effect, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Great chance!” On condition that the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within the vibration time. Is done. In addition, when the notice C is determined as the type of operation notice effect, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Chance!” On condition that the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within the vibration time. Done.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, as the combination of the vibration time of the stick controller 122 and the type of operation announcement effect, the vibration time “5 seconds” and the type of operation announcement effect “notice A” are determined. In this case, a determination value is assigned in each vibration time / notice type determination table so that the ratio of winning a jackpot is the highest. Further, when the vibration time “3 seconds” and the operation notice effect type “notice B” are determined as a combination of the vibration time of the stick controller 122 and the operation notice effect type, the ratio of the big hit is the next highest. Thus, a determination value is assigned in each vibration time / notice type determination table. Further, when the vibration time “1 second” and the type of operation notice effect “notice C” are determined as a combination of the vibration time of the stick controller 122 and the kind of operation notice effect, the ratio of the big hit becomes the lowest. As described above, a determination value is assigned in each vibration time / notice type determination table.

  Note that the method of allocating the judgment value in each vibration time / notice type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the combination of the vibration time of the stick controller 122 and the type of the operation announcement effect is determined to determine the vibration time and the type of the operation announcement effect in a lump. The method of determining the vibration time of the stick controller 122 and the type of the operation announcement effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, first, after determining the vibration time of the stick controller 122, the type of the operation notice effect may be determined independently of the vibration time or according to the determined vibration time. Also, for example, conversely, first, after determining the type of the operation preview effect, the vibration time may be determined independently of the type of the operation notification effect or according to the determined type of the operation notification effect. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets an operation advance notice execution flag indicating that the operation advance notice effect is executed according to the type of the operation advance notice effect determined in step S1510 (step S1511). In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 may set a different flag as the operation notice execution flag in accordance with the determined type of the operation notice effect. Further, for example, when the operation advance notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), the effect control CPU 101 determines which type of the operation advance notice effect is in a predetermined bit of the operation advance notice execution flag. By setting a value to be specified, it may be possible to specify which type of operation notice effect is determined.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the vibration time determined in step S1510 in, for example, a predetermined vibration time storage area provided in the RAM.

  In this embodiment, after the notice effect setting process (see step S8016) is executed, in step S8017 of the effect symbol variation start process, the operation notice effect is set according to the operation notice execution flag set in step S1511. The process table corresponding to the identified type of the operation notice effect is selected. For example, when the type of the operation announcement effect is specified as the announcement A based on the operation announcement execution flag, a process table corresponding to the announcement A is selected in step S8017. Further, for example, when the type of the operation announcement effect is specified as the announcement B based on the operation announcement execution flag, a process table corresponding to the announcement B is selected in step S8017. Further, for example, when the type of the operation notice effect is specified as the notice C based on the operation notice execution flag, a process table corresponding to the notice C is selected in step S8017.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern has been received as the variation pattern command (step S1512). Whether or not a command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that a command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern has been received (Y in step S1512), the effect control CPU 101 uses the big hit as a table for determining the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 during the operation notice effect. A vibration timing determination table is selected (step S1513). Then, control goes to a step S1515.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern is not a big hit (that is, when the super reach is out), the effect control CPU 101 uses the reach as a table for determining the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 during the operation notice effect. A vibration timing determination table is selected (step S1514). Then, control goes to a step S1515.

  In step S1515, the effect control CPU 101 uses the vibration timing determination table selected in steps S1513 and S1514 to perform a lottery process based on a random number for determining the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 during the operation notice effect. The vibration timing of the controller 122 is determined. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a vibration timing determination table. Among these, FIG. 55 (A) is a big hit vibration timing determination table selected in step S1513. FIG. 55B is a vibration timing determination table for reaching deviation selected in step S1514. As shown in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, as the operation timing of the stick controller 122, when the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started 5 seconds after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, There is a case where the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, in the case of a big hit, the stick controller 122 is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the display of the effect symbols at a higher rate than when the super reach is lost. In each vibration timing determination table, a determination value is assigned so that the vibration operation of is started. Note that the method of allocating the judgment value in each vibration timing determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of a big hit, the super reach is out of proportion. The determination value may be assigned in each vibration timing determination table so that the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started 2 seconds after the start of the display of the effect symbols.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 sets the vibration timing (5 seconds or 2 seconds in this example) determined in step S1515 to the vibration start time measurement timer 1 for measuring the timing of starting the vibration of the stick controller 122. (Step S1516).

  FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the vibration start time measurement timer 1 (step S8103). If the effect control CPU 101 is set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of a vibration time measurement timer 1 described later (step S8104).

  In addition, when the process timer times out (step S8105), the effect control CPU 101 switches the process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8106). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect part) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8107). In this case, when it is determined to execute the operation advance notice effect in the notice effect setting process in step S8016, for example, the crane is operated on the display screen of the effect display device 9 to obtain a prize. Produce a crane game display. In this case, for example, it is desirable to move and display the crane on the display screen of the effect display device 9 according to the operation of the stick controller 122 by the player.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the vibration flag 1 indicating that the stick controller 122 is performing a vibration operation is set (step S8108). The vibration flag 1 is set in step S8115 described later.

  If the vibration flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation advance notice execution flag is set (step S8109). If the operation advance notice execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the vibration start time measurement timer 1 has timed out (step S8110). If the vibration start time measurement timer 1 has timed out (that is, if the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 is reached), the effect control CPU 101 starts the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 by driving the vibrator motor 126. (Step S8111) and the vibration flag 1 is set (step S8112). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the vibration time determined in step S1510 of the notice effect setting process to the vibration time measurement timer 1 for measuring the vibration time after the stick controller 122 starts the vibration operation (step S1510). S8113).

  If the vibration flag 1 is set in step S8108, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the vibration time measurement timer 1 has timed out (step S8114). If the vibration time measurement timer 1 has not timed out (that is, if it is still within the vibration time of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 has been detected. (Step S8115). In this embodiment, in step S8115, the effect control CPU 101 provides the stick controller 122 with a detection signal indicating that the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 is tilted toward the front as viewed from the player. It is determined whether or not there is an input from the existing tilt direction sensor unit 12. When the operation in the predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 sets the operation detection flag 1 indicating that the operation in the predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 has been detected (step S8116).

  If the vibration time measurement timer 1 has timed out in step S8114 (that is, if the vibration time has elapsed after the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 has started), the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 126. To stop the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 (step S8117). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 also resets the vibration flag 1. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation detection flag 1 is set (step S8118). If the operation detection flag 1 is not set (that is, if an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is not detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 is used for an operation failure. Switching to process data is performed (step S8119), and the process timer is restarted (step S8120). Thereafter, in accordance with the process table switched in step S8119, step S8107 is executed after the next timer interruption, so that an effect corresponding to the failure of the operation of the stick controller 122 (for example, the effect display device 9) On the display screen, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Oh!” Is executed.

  On the other hand, when the operation detection flag 1 is set in step S8118 (that is, when an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 Then, without executing the processes of steps S8119 and S8120, the process proceeds to step S8121 as it is. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the process data selected in step S8017 of the effect symbol variation start process as it is, and step S8107 is executed after the next timer interruption, whereby the remaining operation notice effect is left. The production will be executed. In this case, for example, when process data corresponding to the operation notice effect of the notice A is set, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Gekiatsu!” On the display screen of the effect display device 9 is executed. . For example, when the process data corresponding to the operation notice effect of the notice B is set, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Great chance!” On the display screen of the effect display device 9 is executed. For example, when the process data corresponding to the operation notice effect of the notice C is set, the effect of displaying a character string such as “Chance!” On the display screen of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Even when the operation detection flag 1 is set in step S8118 (that is, when an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the operation of the stick controller 122 is also performed. Switch to process data for executing an effect corresponding to the success, and execute the remaining effects of the operation preview effect by executing step S8107 after the next timer interruption according to the switched process table. You may do it.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether any continuous notice execution flag is set (step S8121). If any continuous notice execution flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S8122). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the CPU for effect control 101 performs “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode change”, according to the effect form determined in the continuous notice effect form determining process in step S6019 Control is performed to execute the continuous notice effect in the effect mode of either “countdown” or “holding ball change” (step S 8123). In addition, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect, specifically, the continuous notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the change of the effect symbol. The In addition, when executing the continuous notice effect, the process of step S813 is executed on the condition that it is determined as Y in step S8121 at the timing when the continuous notice effect is executed, and the continuous notice interruption flag is not set. . Then, it is repeatedly determined as Y in step S8121 until the continuous notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8123 is executed. On the other hand, if the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8122, that is, if the continuous notice effect is being interrupted, the process proceeds to step S8124 as it is without executing step S8123.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8124), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8125).

  FIG. 58 to FIG. 60 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode of the operation notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d and the reserved storage display portions 18c and 18d are not shown for easy explanation. 58 to 60, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  The production control microcomputer 100 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and starts the fluctuation display of the production symbol as shown in FIG. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 decides to execute the operation notice effect in the notice effect setting process (see step S8016), and selects process data corresponding to the operation notice effect (see step S8017). ), It is assumed that the change display of the design symbol has started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), for example, a picture of the stick controller 122 is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and “Chance game! Get the prize by defeating the V trigger!” Is displayed, and the operation preview effect is started. When the operation preview effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (2) and subsequent drawings, the variation display of the effect symbol is continuously reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  Next, when the operation advance notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), the prize group 201 is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the crane 200 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 58 (3) and (4), an effect is produced in which the crane 200 moves from the left to the center of the display screen. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58 (4) and 58 (4), as shown in FIGS. 58 (3) and (4), the player performs an operation to tilt the stick controller 122 to the right. In addition, it is desirable to execute such an effect that the crane 200 moves in the right direction.

  Next, when the timing for starting the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 comes, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started as shown in FIG. 59 (5) (see steps S8110 and S8111). In the example shown in FIG. 59, it is assumed that the stick controller 122 is vibrated for one second based on the determination result of the vibration time in the notice effect setting process (see step S8016) (see step S1510). In the example shown in FIG. 59, based on the result of determination of vibration timing in the notice effect setting process (see step S8016) (see step S1515), the vibration of the stick controller 122 is 2 seconds after the start of the variable display as the vibration timing. The operation shall be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (5), when the player performs an operation of tilting the stick controller 122 in the forward direction within the time during which the stick controller 122 is oscillating (predetermined vibration time). As shown in FIGS. 59 (6) and (7), the crane 200 performs an effect in which the prize is successfully picked up. As shown in FIG. 59 (8), a predetermined gaming state (a big hit or A display is made in advance of the possibility of becoming a super-reach. In the example shown in FIG. 59 (8), “chance!” Is based on the fact that “notice C” has been determined as the type of operation notice effect in the notice effect setting process (see step S8016) (see step S1510). The case where a character string such as is displayed is shown. When the stick controller 122 is operated within a predetermined vibration time, as shown in FIGS. 59 (6) to 59 (8) as it is, according to the process data selected in step S8017 of the effect symbol variation start process. Production is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (13), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (in this example, the symbol “7”), and the reach state is reached, and a shift to the reach effect is made.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59 (9), even if the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started (refer to Steps S8110 and S8111), the operation cannot be performed within a predetermined vibration time. As shown in FIGS. 59 (10) and (11), when the stick controller 122 is operated after the stick controller 122 finishes the vibration operation (after the predetermined vibration time is finished), as shown in FIGS. An effect in which the crane 200 fails to grab the prize is executed, and as shown in FIG. 59 (12), an effect in which a character string such as “Oh!” Is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Executed. If the operation of the stick controller 122 fails, the process data selected in step S8017 of the production symbol variation start process is switched to the process data for the operation failure (see step S8119). The effects as shown in FIGS. 59 (10) to 59 (12) are executed according to the data. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (13), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (in this example, the symbol “7”), and the reach state is reached, and a shift to the reach effect is made.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 59 (9) to 59 (12), when the stick controller 122 is operated after a predetermined vibration time, the operation is switched to the effect for operation failure. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where the operation is performed after a predetermined vibration time. For example, when the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed only before the predetermined vibration time, or the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. Even when it is not performed at all, the same effects as in FIGS. 59 (9) to 59 (12) are executed. Further, even when the stick controller 122 is operated within a predetermined vibration time, even when the stick controller 122 is operated in a direction other than a predetermined direction (in this example, the front side), FIG. An effect similar to that shown in FIG. 59 (12) is executed.

  In this embodiment, the vibration time of the stick controller 122 may be determined to be longer than 1 second, such as 3 seconds or 5 seconds (see step S1510). In the example shown in FIGS. 60 (14) to 60 (17), a case where a longer time is determined as the vibration time of the stick controller 122 is shown. In this example, it is assumed that 3 seconds is determined as the vibration time of the stick controller 122. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (14), when the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started (see steps S8110 and S8111), as shown in FIGS. It is vibrated for a long time (3 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (15), when the player performs an operation of tilting the stick controller 122 in the forward direction within the time during which the stick controller 122 is oscillating (predetermined vibration time). As shown in FIGS. 60 (15) and (16), the crane 200 performs an effect of successfully capturing the prize, and as shown in FIG. A display is made in advance of the possibility of becoming a super-reach. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (17), “Notice B” is determined as the type of operation notice effect in the notice effect setting process (see step S 8016) (see step S 1510). A character string such as “” is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (22), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, the symbol “7”), and the reach state is reached.

  In this embodiment, the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 may be determined to be 5 seconds later than 2 seconds after the start of variation display (see step S1515). In the example shown in FIGS. 60 (18) to 60 (21), the case where the later 5 seconds is determined as the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (18), the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is not started even after 2 seconds after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, and as shown in FIG. 60 (19), The vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started based on 5 seconds after the start of the variable display (see steps S8110 and S8111). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (19), when the player performs an operation of tilting the stick controller 122 in the forward direction within the time during which the stick controller 122 is oscillating (predetermined vibration time). As shown in FIGS. 60 (19) and (20), the crane 200 performs an effect in a manner of successfully grabbing the prize, and as shown in FIG. A display is made in advance of the possibility of becoming a super-reach. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (21), based on the fact that “notice C” is determined as the type of the operation notice effect in the notice effect setting process (see step S8016) (see step S1510), “Gekiatsu! A character string such as “” is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (22), the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, the symbol “7”), and the reach state is reached.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the handling when the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the winning determination result for the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13. is there. Among these, FIG. 61 (A) shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “change of the variation mode at the time of symbol variation” or “mode transition” is executed. Show. FIG. 61 (B) shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “countdown” or “holding ball change” is being executed.

  In this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the continuous notice effect is given. Is interrupted (see step S8004). In this case, if the change in the first special symbol for which the reason for the execution of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined is due to the determination at the time of winning as “non-reach”, the second special symbol As shown in FIG. 61, even if the change display is ended and the display is changed to the change display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice effect is ended as it is without restarting the interrupted continuous notice effect (Y in step S8007). , S8008). In addition, when the variation of the first special symbol is due to the determination of winning out of “super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”, the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated and the first special symbol is terminated. When the variable display is restored, as shown in FIG. 61, the remaining continuous notice effect is resumed and executed (see N in step S8007). However, if the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed by interrupting the continuous notice effect is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 61, the interruption is performed regardless of the reason for executing the interrupted continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect is terminated as it is without restarting the continuous notice effect (see step S978 described later).

  As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, when it is determined at the time of winning that the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is “non-reach”, “countdown” and “change in reserved ball” There is no case where a continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the change in the first special symbol for which the reason for execution of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined is determined to be “non-reach out” at the time of winning. Since there is no case where the continuous notice effect is executed, there is no problem that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted and executed.

  Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, when the change display of the second special symbol interrupts during execution of the continuous notice effect, the notice effect ( It is controlled so as not to execute (the effect of giving a notice to the variable display of the second special symbol) (see Y in step S8015).

  In this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13, the continuous display is interrupted. This shows the case where the notice effect is temporarily interrupted and resumed or finished after the second special symbol's variable display ends. However, if the second special symbol's variable display interrupts, the setting of the continuous notice effect is cleared and the continuous notice is given. You may comprise so that an effect may be complete | finished uniformly.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S871). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S883. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S882. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S884. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S871 is a stage where the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the stop symbol of the effect symbols in steps S872 to S873 is displayed. The process proceeds to step S883 without repeatedly executing the process.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S872). The production control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the production symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Then, when the big hit symbol is not displayed in step S872 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed: N in step S873), the production control CPU 101 determines whether any continuous notice execution flag is set. Determination is made (step S874). If it is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S875). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S876). Further, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S877). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set continuous notice execution flag (first continuous notice execution flag or second continuous notice execution flag). (Step S878). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is executed until the display of the change one time before the start of the change subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the determination at the time of winning is determined. The continuous notice execution flag is reset at the start of the subject variable display (the continuous notice effect is not performed during the variable display subject to the winning determination). Note that the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the counter for the number of times after time reduction (step S879). It should be noted that the processing for counting the number of times after time reduction in step S879 may be executed only when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state. Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S880). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag such as a display result designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 47, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S881).

  When the big win symbol is displayed in step S872 (Y in step S873), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S882) and checks whether the fanfare flag is set (step S883). . When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S883), the production control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S884) and confirms whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit is true (step S885). ). Specifically, whether or not the probability big hit or the normal big hit is confirmed by a display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is not the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit (that is, if the probability variation big hit or the small hit suddenly), the process proceeds to step S888.

  If it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit in step S885 (that is, if it is a big hit for 15 rounds), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the big hit number counter (step S886). A selection effect setting process for setting a selection effect to be described later (in this embodiment, an effect of selecting an effect to be executed during the big hit game) is executed (step S887).

  In this embodiment, the big hit number counter is incremented by 1 in step S886, and if the normal state is obtained by executing step S668A of the command analysis process, the big hit number counter is reset, so The number of times that a big hit has occurred within the period of the state or the short time state is counted. In this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit is first generated from the normal state and the state is shifted to the probability variation state or the short time state, the first probability variation big hit or the normal big hit is also generated once. It shows the case where the big hit number counter is counted up, but to be exact, since the big hit gaming state due to the first probability change big hit or the normal big hit ends, it shifts to the probability change state or the short time state Therefore, the probability change big hit or the normal big hit that occurred first is not counted as one time, and then the number of big hits that have occurred since the big hit gaming state is ended and controlled to the probability change state or the short time state is counted. You may do it.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S888). In this case, when the effect control CPU 101 is set to execute the selected effect in the selected effect setting process in step S887, the process control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect. Then, the process timer is started (step S889).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a big hit (including a sudden probability variation big hit) (step S890). Whether or not it is a big hit can be specifically determined by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a big hit, the CPU 101 for effect control clears the counter for the number of times after the time reduction for counting the number of fluctuations after the transition to the time reduction state (step S891). That is, if it is a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit or sudden probability change big hit), there is a possibility of shifting to the short-time state after the big hit game is finished, so the number-of-short-time counter is reset. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S879, S890, and S891, the number of executions of the variable display after shifting to the time-saving state can be counted.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S892).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the selection effect setting process in step S887. The “selective effect” is an effect for selecting an effect to be executed during a certain effect period. In this embodiment, a big hit is made before the start of the big hit game (specifically, during the fanfare effect). Productions that are executed during the game (productions during rounds and productions during intervals) are special rounds (for example, productions using characters and background colors that are different from the regular rounds, and output sounds that are different from the regular rounds ( For example, an effect of outputting a sound of a song different from that of the normal round) or an effect corresponding to the normal round is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the selection effect is executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated for a predetermined vibration time. This “predetermined vibration time” is the time for which the stick controller 122 is vibrated during the execution period of the selected effect, and the player operates the stick controller 122 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, the forward direction). This is the time for accepting the operation to tilt as a valid operation. Therefore, in this embodiment, an effect that is executed during a big hit game (a round effect or An effect corresponding to a special round is selected as an interval effect). On the other hand, if the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction, if it is not within a predetermined vibration time, an effect corresponding to a normal round is provided as an effect (in-round effect or interval effect) executed during the big hit game. Selected. In this embodiment, 5 seconds, 3 seconds, or 1 second may be determined as the predetermined vibration time.

  When a selection effect is executed, a specific effect is selected on the condition that the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within a predetermined vibration time during the execution of the selection effect. In the embodiment, an effect corresponding to a special round is selected as the “specific effect” on condition that the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within a predetermined vibration time before the start of the big hit game. Executed during. Note that the execution timing of the selected effect and the effect selected as the specific effect are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, the selected effect is executed at the start of variation of the effect symbol or during the variation display, On the condition that the controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within a predetermined vibration time, the “designated effect” may be displayed as a “specific effect” in a different effect mode than usual. In addition, for example, there is not before the start of the big hit game, but the selection effect is executed at the start of the big hit (for example, the first round) or a predetermined round during the big hit game (for example, the seventh round or the tenth round), and the stick controller On the condition that 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within a predetermined vibration time, an effect corresponding to a special round may be executed as a “specific effect” in a round after a predetermined round.

  In the selection effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first uses a selection effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the selection effect, and uses a random number for determining whether or not to execute the selection effect. To determine whether or not to execute the selection effect (step S1601). FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the selection effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit is reached, the determination value is assigned in the selection effect determination table so that the selection effect is executed at a rate of 50%. Yes. Note that the method of allocating the determination value in the selection effect determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the selection effect is executed according to the number of times that the big hit has occurred based on the value of the big hit number counter. Determination values may be assigned so that the ratios are different.

  Next, when it is determined to execute the selected effect (Y in step S1602), the effect control CPU 101 specifies the number of times that the big hit is based on the value of the big hit number counter, and based on the specified number of big hits. Then, the vibration time of the stick controller 122 is determined (step S1603). FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a method for determining the vibration time. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, if the number of big hits is 3 or more, the vibration time of the stick controller 122 is determined to be 5 seconds, and if the number of big hits is 2, the vibration time of the stick controller 122 is determined. If the number of big hits is 1, the vibration time of the stick controller 122 is determined to be 1 second.

  Note that the vibration time is not uniquely determined according to the number of jackpots, but a sticking time determination table for determining the vibration time is prepared in advance, and a lottery process using random numbers is performed, whereby the stick controller 122 is determined. The vibration time may be determined. In this case, the determination value of the vibration time determination table may be allocated so that the vibration time becomes longer as the number of big hits increases.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the vibration time determined in step S1603 in, for example, a predetermined vibration time storage area provided in the RAM.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a selection effect execution flag indicating that the selection effect is executed (step S1604).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the vibration timing determination table (for selection effect) for determining the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 during the selection effect to determine the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 during the selection effect. The lottery process based on the random number is performed, and the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 is determined (step S1605). FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the vibration timing determination table (for selection effect). As shown in FIG. 66, in this embodiment, as the operation timing of the stick controller 122, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started 5 seconds after the fanfare effect is started, and the fanfare effect is started. In some cases, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started after 2 seconds from the start. Note that the method of allocating the judgment value in the vibration timing determination table (for selection effect) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. Determination values may be assigned so that the timing is different.

  Then, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the vibration timing (5 seconds or 2 seconds in this example) determined in step S1605 to the vibration start time measurement timer 2 for measuring the timing of starting the vibration of the stick controller 122. (Step S1606).

  67 and 68 are flowcharts showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received (that is, the big prize opening at the start of round 1). Whether or not a display command during opening has been received is confirmed (step S901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the vibration start time measurement timer 2 (step S902A). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of a vibration time measurement timer 2 described later (step S902B).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, etc.) in accordance with the contents of the process data n (step S903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot symbol and performs an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a jackpot has occurred. In this case, when it is determined to execute the selection effect in the selection effect setting process in step S887, for example, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, depending on the operation of the stick controller 122 by the player, the big hit An effect of selecting whether the round in game is a special round or a normal round is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the vibration flag 2 indicating that the stick controller 122 is performing a vibration operation is set (step S907). The vibration flag 2 is set in step S911 described later.

  If the vibration flag 2 is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the selection effect execution flag is set (step S908). If the selection effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the vibration start time measurement timer 2 has timed out (step S909). If the vibration start time measurement timer 2 has timed out (that is, if the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 is reached), the effect control CPU 101 starts the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 by driving the vibrator motor 126. (Step S910) and the vibration flag 2 is set (step S911). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the vibration time determined in step S1603 of the selected effect setting process in the vibration time measurement timer 2 for measuring the vibration time after the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started (step S1603). S912).

  If the during-vibration flag 2 is set in step S907, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the vibration time measurement timer 2 has timed out (step S913). If the vibration time measurement timer 2 has not timed out (that is, if it is still within the vibration time of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 has been detected. (Step S914). In this embodiment, in step S914, the effect control CPU 101 provides the stick controller 122 with a detection signal indicating that the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 has been tilted in the right direction as viewed from the player. It is determined whether or not there is an input from the existing tilt direction sensor unit 12. When the operation in the predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 sets the operation detection flag 2 indicating that the operation in the predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 has been detected (step S915).

  If the vibration time measurement timer 2 has timed out in step S913 (that is, if the vibration time has elapsed after the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 has started), the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 126. Is stopped and the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is stopped (step S916). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 also resets the vibration flag 2. Further, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation detection flag 2 is set (step S917). If the operation detection flag 2 is not set (that is, if an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is not detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 is used for an operation failure. Switching to process data is performed (step S918), and the process timer is restarted (step S919). Thereafter, in accordance with the process table switched in step S918, step S903 is executed after the next timer interruption, so that an effect corresponding to the failure of the operation of the stick controller 122 (for example, a normal round is determined). Effect) is executed.

  On the other hand, when the operation detection flag 2 is set in step S917 (that is, when an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 Then, the process ends without executing the processes of steps S918 and S919. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 uses the process data selected in step S888 of the effect symbol variation stop process as it is, and executes step S903 after the next timer interruption, thereby remaining effects of the selected effect. Will be executed. In this case, for example, an effect that displays that the special round has been decided is executed.

  Even when the operation detection flag 2 is set in step S917 (that is, even when an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. By switching to process data for executing the production corresponding to the success, and executing step S903 after the next timer interruption according to the switched process table, the remaining production of the selected production (for example, special You may make it perform the production which displays that it was decided in the round.

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation detection flag 2 is set (step S920). When the operation detection flag 2 is set (that is, when an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 opens the big prize opening. Based on the contents of the middle display command, an effect during the round for a special round (for example, an effect using a character or background color different from the normal round. Also, a sound output different from the normal round is performed (for example, a normal round and (Outputs the sound of a different song)) is selected (step S921). On the other hand, if the operation detection flag 2 is not set (that is, if an operation in a predetermined direction by the stick controller 122 is not detected during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the winning prize opening Based on the contents of the open display command, a mid-round effect for the normal round is selected (step S922).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the big winning opening open flag (step S923), and selects process data corresponding to the in-round effect selected in steps S921 and S922 (step S924). Then, the process timer is started (step S925), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round process (step S805) (step S926).

  After that, when a special round is selected, an in-round effect or an interval effect corresponding to the special round is executed between each round or round in the big hit game. On the other hand, when the normal round is selected, an effect during the round or an interval effect corresponding to the normal round is executed between each round or round in the big hit game.

  FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of the effect mode of the selection effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d and the reserved storage display portions 18c and 18d are not shown for ease of explanation. 69 and FIG. 70, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  As shown in FIGS. 69 (1) to 69 (3), a reach state occurs in the variation display of the effect symbol, and finally the big hit symbol is derived and displayed to become a big hit, and the selected effect setting process (see step S887). In the fanfare effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), for example, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, “the operation may be performed at the timing during vibration”. A character string such as "May!"

  Next, when the timing for starting the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 comes, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started as shown in FIG. 70 (5) (see steps S909 and S910). In the example shown in FIG. 70, it is assumed that the stick controller 122 is vibrated for one second based on the determination result of the vibration time in the selection effect setting process (see step S887) (see step S1603). In the example shown in FIG. 70, the vibration of the stick controller 122 is 2 seconds after the start of the fanfare effect as the vibration timing based on the vibration timing determination result of the selection effect setting process (see step S887) (see step S1605). The operation shall be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (5), when the player performs an operation of tilting the stick controller 122 in the right direction within the time during which the stick controller 122 is vibrating (predetermined vibration time). As shown in FIGS. 70 (6) and (7), a display (for example, a character string such as “special round decision!”) Indicating that a special round has been selected after a predetermined vibration time has elapsed is displayed. The Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (8), a character string such as “big hit!” Is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the big hit game is started. When the stick controller 122 is operated within a predetermined vibration time, as shown in FIGS. 70 (6) to 70 (8) as it is, according to the process data selected in step S888 of the effect symbol variation stop process. Production is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (9), even if the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started (see steps S909 and S910), the operation cannot be performed within a predetermined vibration time, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 70, when the stick controller 122 is operated after the stick controller 122 finishes the vibration operation (after the predetermined vibration time is finished), as shown in FIG. A display indicating that the normal round has been selected after the elapse of time (for example, a character string such as “Okay but normal round decided!”) Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (12), a character string such as “big hit!” Is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the big hit game is started. If the operation of the stick controller 122 fails, the process data selected in step S888 of the production symbol fluctuation stop process is switched to the process data for the operation failure (see step S918), and the process after the switching is performed. Effects shown in FIGS. 70 (10) to 70 (12) are executed in accordance with the data.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 70 (9) to 70 (12), when the stick controller 122 is operated and is operated after a predetermined vibration time, it is executed by switching to the effect for operation failure. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where the operation is performed after a predetermined vibration time. For example, the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed only before the predetermined vibration time, or the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. Even if no is performed, the same effects as in FIGS. 70 (9) to 70 (12) are executed. Even when the stick controller 122 is operated within a predetermined vibration time, even when the stick controller 122 is operated in a direction other than a predetermined direction (right direction in this example), FIG. ~ The same effect as in Fig. 70 (12) is executed.

  As in the case of the operation announcement effect, in this embodiment, even when the selection effect is executed, the vibration time of the stick controller 122 is determined to be longer than 1 second, such as 3 seconds or 5 seconds. (See step S1603). As in the case of the operation announcement effect, in this embodiment, even when the selection effect is executed, the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 is determined to be 5 seconds later than 2 seconds after the start of the fanfare effect. (See step S1605).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the effect of the aspect in which the special round is selected is executed based on the successful operation of the stick controller 122 as the effect selection mode in the selection effect is shown. The production mode of production is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a selection effect may be executed in such a manner that a plurality of options are displayed and the stick controller 122 is operated to select and select one of the options.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game (step S971). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the big hit game have been completed, for example, during production during round (see step S805) or post-round processing (see step S806). Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the production period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27 etc.) is executed (step S974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Even when the ending effect is executed, a different effect is determined based on whether or not the operation detection flag 2 is set (that is, based on whether or not the operation of the stick controller 122 is successfully performed during the selection effect). The ending effect of the aspect may be selected and executed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  When the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S972), the production control CPU 101, if set, has a continuous advance notice execution flag (in this embodiment, a first off-continuous advance notice execution flag, The one-reach continuous notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous notice execution flag) and the continuous notice interruption flag are reset (step S978). When the process of step S978 is executed and the change display of the second special symbol is executed in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the change display result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Is controlled to end the continuous notice effect as it is without continuing the interrupted remaining continuous notice effect.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S979). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag such as a display result designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S980).

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect will be described. 72-75 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. Among these, FIG. 72 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 73 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift”. FIG. 74 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “countdown”. FIG. 75 shows a specific example of the effect of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change”. 72 to 75, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, a determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, a continuous notice effect is shown, but the determination at the time of winning is made for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the continuous notice effect is performed while the display is being executed, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 72, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 72, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 72 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 72 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and “the change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol change” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. "Is determined (see step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 72 (1) and 72 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 72 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 72 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (5), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 72 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 72 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 72 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 72 (6), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8123). The predetermined effect performed at the start of the change of the effect symbol is not limited to the one shown in FIG. The movable object having the shape described above may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of fluctuation. Further, for example, the way of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 72 (5), the way of stopping the variation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (7), the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see step S8107), and as shown in FIG. Step S8301). 72 (6) and (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 72 (8).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 72 (9), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 72 (9), a predetermined effect is performed, such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8123). Also in the case shown in FIG. 72 (9), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  Thereafter, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 72, during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. Therefore, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variation of the fourth symbol is always displayed, or the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped. This also applies to the case where the continuous notice effect is executed in the effect modes shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 described below. Further, when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 73, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 73 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 73 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the continuous notice effect is to be executed and “mode shift” has been decided as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 73 (1) and 73 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 73 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 73 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “mode transition” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the change in the effect symbol as shown in FIG. 73 (4). An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background) An effect in such a manner that the screen is in contact with the screen is executed (see step S8123). Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (5), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8123), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 73 ( In 5), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 73 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 73 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 73 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol display as shown in FIG. 73 (6). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen, and the two background screens collide with each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen meet each other) An effect of such an aspect is executed (see step S8123). Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (7), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8123), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 73 ( In step 7), the dissociation symbol) is stopped (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 73 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 73 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 73 (8), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 73 (8). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen, and the two background screens collide with each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen meet each other) An effect of such an aspect is executed (see step S8123). Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (9), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8123), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 73 ( In 9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 73 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 73 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing the effect in such a manner that the two background screens overlap each other, Alternatively, the background screen that has interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode transition” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of being pushed back to the original background screen at the end of each change display, You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a specific example of the production mode of the “countdown” continuous notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 74, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 74 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 74 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect and the “countdown” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 74 (1) and 74 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 74 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 74 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “countdown” has been determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 74 (4). On the display screen of the display device 9, a character string such as “Count 3!” Is displayed, and an effect as if the countdown is started is executed (see step S 8123). Then, the fluctuation time is ended, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is not shown in FIG. 74 (5)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. Also in the case shown in FIG. 74 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 74 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 74 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 74 (6). A character string such as “Count 2!” Is displayed on the screen, and the effect of the aspect of continuously counting down is executed (see step S8123). Then, the variation time ends, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 74 (7)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (7) (see step S8301). In the case shown in FIG. 74 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 74 (7), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 74 (8), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 74 (8). A character string such as “Count 1!” Is displayed on the screen, and an effect is produced in which the countdown continues (see step S8123). Then, the fluctuation time is ended, and the final stop symbol (in FIG. 74 (9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (9) (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 74 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 74 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 75, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 75 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 75 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and decides the “reserved ball change” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. (See step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 75 (1) and 75 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 75 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 75 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75 (4), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the production symbol based on the fact that “holding ball change” is determined as the production mode of the continuous notice production. Then, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is changed to a display different from the normal display (star display in the example shown in FIG. 75 (4)). Step S8123). In the example shown in FIG. 75, after the winning determination is made, the continuous notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is started from the next variation start time display. When the determination result designation command is received (at the timing when the start winning is generated), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is changed to a display different from the normal display and the continuous notice effect is performed. You may make it start. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 75 (5), the final stop symbol (disconnected symbol in FIG. 75 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). In addition, as shown in FIG. 75 (5), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 75). 75 (5) is a star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 75 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 75 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 75 (6), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “holding ball change” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first hold storage during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 75 (6). In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continued in a display different from the normal display (star display in the example shown in FIG. 75 (6)) (see step S8123). Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 75 (7)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 75 (7) (see step S8301). In addition, as shown in FIG. 75 (7), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 75). 75 (7) is a star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 75 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 75 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 75 (8), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that the “holding ball change” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first reserved storage during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 75 (8). In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is continued in a display different from the normal display (star display in the example shown in FIG. 75 (8)) (see step S8123). Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 75 (9), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 75 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). In addition, as shown in FIG. 75 (9), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 75). 75 (9), star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 75 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 75 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as the variation pattern (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2 shown in FIG. 7). -3, normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3) are determined, a pseudo-series effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a pseudo-continuous rendering mode. In addition, in FIG. 76, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3) .... In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 76, a case is shown in which pseudo-continuation is performed when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the first special symbol variation display, but the second special symbol variation display is performed. In the case where the quasi-continuation is performed while the effect symbol variation display is being executed in synchronization with the simulating, the quasi-continuation is executed in the same effect manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 76, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 76 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command based on the newly received start prize (see step S218A). Further, as shown in FIG. 76 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c based on the received first reserved memory number addition designation command. Increase by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 76 (1) and 76 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 76 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 76 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 has received a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the production symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command that designates the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (5), when the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol comes, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped. Also in the case shown in FIG. 76 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. In FIG. 76 (5), since the variation is not stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol is continuously performed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol without stopping the suspension symbol. Is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 76 (6). In this case, as shown in FIG. 76 (6), a predetermined effect is performed, for example, a display in which a flash is lit above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol. Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of re-variation is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 76, for example, imitating a movable member (for example, a character or the like) provided above, below, or on the side of the effect display device 9. A movable object having a shape) may be moved at the start of re-variation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of re-variation. Further, for example, the way of starting the variation of the symbol at the start of re-variation may be different from the normal one. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 76 (5), the way of temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, middle, and right. In addition, since it is not a case where a new fluctuation | variation is started, as shown in FIG. 76 (6), the display of the 1st reservation memory number in the 1st reservation memory display part 18c does not change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8107), and when the temporary stop timing of the next temporary stop symbol is reached as shown in FIG. The symbol is displayed temporarily. In addition, since the variation is not stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol is continuously executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol without stopping the stop symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 76 (9). In this case, as shown in FIG. 76 (9), a predetermined effect is performed, for example, a display in which a flash is emitted above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol.

  The pseudo-continuous effect is executed by repeatedly executing the temporary stop display of the chance symbol and the re-variation in the above manner. As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of “change in change pattern at the time of symbol change” shown in FIG. 72 and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 76 are executed in a common effect mode. Therefore, even if the same aspect of the effect is executed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that it may be a continuous notice effect or may be a pseudo-ream, and the interest in the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, the execution timing of the continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the continuous notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 77, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 77, as an example, a case where a continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” is executed is shown. The timing is the same.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see Steps S311 and S313), the winning effect processing (see Steps S217A and S217B) is performed. Execute and determine when winning. If a new start winning is detected in the first start winning opening 13, it is not in the high base state (probability change state or short time state) and is not in the big hit gaming state (see steps S215A and S216A). Then, the winning time effect process is executed to determine the winning time. Then, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted based on the determination result of winning determination (see steps S218A and S218B).

  The production control microcomputer 100 adds 1 to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) based on the reception of the reserved memory number addition designation command (steps S651, S652, S654, S655). reference). In the example shown in FIG. 77, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories before receiving the winning determination result specifying command and the reserved memory number addition specifying command is 3, and the production control microcomputer 100 executes the reserved memory number addition specifying command. Based on the reception, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area (the first reserved memory number storage area or the second reserved memory number storage area) is incremented by 1 to 4. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a continuous notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800E), and a continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6019). It is assumed that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the production mode. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current reserved memory number (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 77) in the variation counter (see step S6021). Thereafter, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the fluctuation number counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S876).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, a reserved memory number increase designation command (a first reserved memory number increase designation command or a second pending memory number increase designation command) are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. Shall. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (see step S8301). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (see step S876).

  Further, when the next variation display is started, the production control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 2, as shown in FIG. By performing a predetermined effect such as displaying a mode in which the flash shines above the display screen (see step S8123), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (see step S8301). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (see step S876).

  Further, when the next variation display is started, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 1, as shown in FIG. By performing a predetermined effect such as displaying a mode in which the flash shines above the display screen (see step S8123), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (see step S8301). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (see step S876). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the continuous advance notice execution flag that has been set based on the fact that the value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (see steps S877 and S878), and performs the advance notice effect. finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, a case where a continuous notice effect is performed during the variation display until the variation display immediately before the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning is shown. However, the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of determination at the time of winning. In this embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is not executed in the variable display that is the target of determination at the time of winning, both the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect are displayed during one variable display. It is executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially, the production is surely prevented from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display). If a continuous notice effect is to be executed even during the fluctuation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect is executed before the super reach effect during the variable display is executed. It is only necessary that the production of super reach be executed after the completion of.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely low, and the gaming state is the probability change state or the short time state (high base state). ), The frequency with which the variable winning ball apparatus is opened is increased. For this reason, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is rare for the game ball to start winning a prize at the second start winning opening 14, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed continuously. In addition, when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state, the frequency at which the game ball starts and wins at the second start winning opening 14 is increased, and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Mainly, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed continuously. However, even if the game state is the normal state, the game ball may start and win at the second start winning port 14 at a low frequency, and the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed. In this case, if there is a start prize for the second start prize opening 14 during the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start prize to the first start prize opening 13, the middle of the continuous notice effect is given. Then, the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol interrupts during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is controlled to be interrupted.

  Hereinafter, the production timing when the continuous notice production is interrupted will be described. 78 and 79 are explanatory diagrams showing the production timing when the continuous notice production is interrupted. Of these, FIG. 78 shows the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the determination of “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13. The production timing in the case of interruption is shown. In addition, FIG. 79 shows the production timing in the case of interrupting the continuous notice production that is executed based on the fact that it is judged as “non-reach” in the judgment at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. Show.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, as an example, a case where a continuous notice effect of “change in variation form at the time of symbol change” is executed is shown, but a continuous notice effect of another effect form is executed. The production timing in this case is also the same. In the example shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 during the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as non-reach or non-reach as a variation display result.

  First, referring to FIG. 78, the continuous advance notice is executed based on the determination of “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning at the first starting winning opening 13. The production timing when the production is interrupted will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning in the first start winning opening 13 (see step S311), it performs a winning effect process (see step S217A) and makes a winning determination. When it is determined that “super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot” is reached, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted (see step S218A). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 has determined “change in variation mode at the time of symbol change” as the production mode of the continuous notice production in the continuous notice production mode determination process (see step S6019).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a first reserved storage number increase designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. Shall. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (see step S8301).

  Further, when starting the next variation display, as shown in FIG. 78, the production control microcomputer 100 displays an aspect in which a flash is lit above the display screen of the production display device 9 when the production symbol variation starts. By performing a predetermined effect such as performing (see step S813), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (see step S8301).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 78, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the execution of the continuous notice effect. In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Therefore, if the second special symbol change display is executed even during execution of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice interruption flag as shown in FIG. Control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect (see steps S8003 and S8004). When the production control microcomputer 100 performs the change display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous notice effect, the other announcement effect is displayed during the change display. Is controlled not to be executed (see Y in step S8015).

  Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the state is returned to the state where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see step S8006), as shown in FIG. , Resume the remaining continuous notice effect. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, when the effect symbol variation display is started in synchronism with the next variation display of the first special symbol, the flash appears above the display screen of the effect display device 9. The continuous notice effect is resumed by performing a predetermined effect such as displaying a certain aspect (see step S813). Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (see step S8301).

  Next, referring to FIG. 79, when the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the fact that the winning determination at the first starting winning opening 13 is “non-reach” is interrupted. The production timing will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning in the first start winning opening 13 (see step S311), it performs a winning effect process (see step S217A) and makes a winning determination. If it is determined that “non-reach” is detected, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted (see step S218A). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 has determined “change in variation mode at the time of symbol change” as the production mode of the continuous notice production in the continuous notice production mode determination process (see step S6019).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a first reserved storage number increase designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. Shall. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (see step S8301).

  Further, when starting the next variation display, as shown in FIG. 79, the production control microcomputer 100 displays an aspect in which a flash is emitted above the display screen of the production display device 9 when the production symbol variation starts. By performing a predetermined effect such as performing (see step S813), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (see step S8301).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 79, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the execution of the continuous notice effect. In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Therefore, if the second special symbol change display is executed even during execution of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice suspension flag as shown in FIG. Control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect (see steps S8003 and S8004). When the production control microcomputer 100 performs the change display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous notice effect, the other announcement effect is displayed during the change display. Is controlled not to be executed (see Y in step S8015).

  Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the state returns to the state where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see step S8006), and the first discontinuous notice is given. The execution flag is reset (see steps S8007 and S8008), and control is performed so as to end the continuous notice effect. In other words, if the determination result that is the reason for executing the continuous notice effect is “non-reach”, as shown in FIG. 79, after the continuous notice effect is interrupted, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Even if it ends, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is ended as it is without restarting the continuous notice effect.

  Next, the continuous notice lottery prohibition period will be described. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the continuous notice lottery prohibition period. When the special symbol variation display is started, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved storage number increase designation command, and starts the variation display. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice prohibition flag and the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer (see step S616A), and until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses as shown in FIG. The execution of the process of determining the continuous notice effect is prohibited.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is received after 4 ms from the reception of the variation pattern command, and the pending storage number subtraction designation command is received after the elapse of 4 ms, but the variation pattern command is received. If a start prize is received within 8 ms from when the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, and when the reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the continuous notice effect is executed based on the number of the reserved memory number that is increased by one. The number of times may be determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 80, when the start-up prize is received before receiving the reserved memory number subtraction designation command after the variable display is started in a state where there are two reserved memories, the presentation control CPU 101 holds the hold Based on the reception of the storage number addition designation command, it is recognized that there are three pending storage numbers. If the continuous notice effect is determined in this state, a situation in which it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed over three variable displays is generated because the number of reserved memories is internally recognized as three. . However, after that, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received and the reserved memory number returns to the state of two, so that the continuous notice effect for three times is actually executed even though only two fluctuation displays are actually executed. As a result, there is a difference between the number of reserved memories and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, even if the variation pattern command is received, the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses. Is prevented from occurring.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the possibility of being controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, to become a big hit or super reach) is a predetermined production device ( In this example, a notice effect (for example, an operation notice effect, a step-up notice effect, a mini character notice effect, etc.) for notifying is executed using the effect display device 9). In addition, a stick controller 122 capable of vibrating operation is provided, and the stick controller 122 is controlled to vibrate over a predetermined vibration time. The notice effect produced by the effect control microcomputer 100 includes an operation notice effect that is executed when the stick controller 122 is operated within a predetermined vibration time during which the stick controller 122 is vibrated. Therefore, the stick controller 122 can be vibrated to perform an unexpected effect on the player, and can notify the player of the timing for operating the stick controller 122. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in a game that involves an operation, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, the player can recognize that the stick controller 122 is oscillating by causing the player to grasp the stick controller 122 in the operation preview effect or the selection effect. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is the operation timing of the controller 122, and to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game accompanied by the operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the player is urged to operate the stick controller 122 by vibrating the stick controller 122 is shown. However, the method of prompting the player to operate is described in this embodiment. It is not limited to what is shown in. For example, it is configured so that wind can be ejected from the front surface of the stick controller 122, and the player is prompted to operate the stick controller 122 by ejecting wind from the front surface of the stick controller 122 in the operation preview effect or selection effect. It may be. Further, for example, the stick controller 122 may be vibrated, and the player may be prompted to operate the stick controller 122 by ejecting wind from the front surface of the stick controller 122.

  Also, the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 may start the vibration of the stick controller 122 immediately after the operation advance notice effect or the selection effect is started. The vibration of the stick controller 122 may be started after the passage.

  Further, in this embodiment, on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful, an operation advance notice effect is executed, or a specific effect (for example, an effect indicating that a special round is determined) is selected in the selected effect. Although the case where it is executed is shown, in addition to the successful operation of the stick controller 122, an operation advance notice effect is executed on the condition that a predetermined command input or the like is made, or a specific effect ( For example, an effect indicating that the special round has been decided) may be executed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the operation advance notice effect is executed as one type of the notice effect determined at the start of the variable display is shown. However, the operation advance notice effect is executed as another notice effect. Also good. For example, the operation notice effect may be executed as one aspect of the continuous notice effect (pre-read notice), and the operation notice effect is provided as one form of the jackpot confirmation notice effect for notifying that the big hit is confirmed during the variable display. You may make it perform.

  When configured to execute the operation advance notice effect as one aspect of the continuous notice effect, for example, the operation advance notice effect may be executed when “mode shift” is selected as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. Good. In this case, for example, if the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines “mode shift” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in step S6019 of the continuous notice effect determination process, steps S1507 to S1516 shown in FIG. A similar process (except for the process of determining the type of operation announcement effect) is executed, and a predetermined vibration time and vibration timing of the stick controller 122 are determined. Then, in the process of step S8123 of the effect symbol variation process, for example, an effect of a mode in which the sea background screen and the mountain background screen as shown in FIGS. 73 (4), (6), and (8) are brought together. When executing, the stick controller 122 is vibrated, and the background screen is switched to a different background screen from the original background screen on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful (for example, from the sea background screen to the mountain background screen). May be performed.

  Further, when the operation notice effect is executed as one aspect of the continuous notice effect, for example, the continuous notice effect is executed on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful. In the case of failure, the continuous notice effect itself may not be executed. Further, in this case, for example, on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 has been successful once, the continuous notice effect may be executed in all the change displays until immediately before the change display of the notice target. The stick controller 122 may be vibrated each time the change display up to immediately before the target change display is executed, and the continuous notice effect may be executed on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful for each change display. .

  Further, when the operation announcement effect is executed as one aspect of the jackpot confirmation announcement effect, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the jackpot in the announcement effect setting process (see step S8016) of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is decided to execute the notice effect, it is decided that the operation notice effect is executed, and the same processing as in steps S1507 to S1516 shown in FIG. 52 (however, the process determining the type of the operation notice effect is excluded). ) And a predetermined vibration time and vibration timing of the stick controller 122 are determined. Then, when the process shifts to the jackpot confirmation notice effect in step S8107 of the effect symbol variation process, the stick controller 122 is vibrated, and the character string indicating that the jackpot is confirmed on condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful. An effect of displaying may be executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as an effect mode of the operation advance notice effect, an aspect in which the effect on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) is changed on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful. Although the case where the effect is executed is shown, the effect mode of the operation notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the operation notice effect may be executed by changing the lighting pattern of the frame LED 28 or outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 27 on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful. In addition, when the gaming machine includes a movable member or an accessory, an operation advance notice effect may be executed by moving the movable member or the accessory on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful.

  In this embodiment, the stick controller 122 is vibrated when the operation announcement effect is executed. However, the push button 120 is not limited to when the stick controller 122 is vibrated. You may comprise so that may be vibrated. Further, for example, when the gaming machine includes an operation unit such as a cross key as an operation unit capable of operation in a plurality of directions, the operation unit such as the cross key may be configured to vibrate in the operation announcement effect. Good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the stick controller 122 has a stick shape and can be operated in a plurality of directions. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the operation notice effect on the condition that an operation in a predetermined direction (in this example, the front direction) of the plurality of directions is detected. Therefore, the stick controller 122 can be operated in various operation modes, an effect that requires a more complicated operation technique can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the operation means is a stick controller 122 that can be tilted. However, any operation means other than the stick controller 122 is used as long as the operation means can be operated in a plurality of directions. May be. For example, an operation preview effect or selection effect may be executed using a switch, button, or controller that can be slid in a plurality of directions as an operation means. Further, for example, a cross key or the like may be provided as the operation means.

  According to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 operates on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected during a period other than the predetermined vibration time during which the stick controller 122 is vibrated. An effect different from the notice effect (in this example, an effect of displaying a character string such as “Oishi!” As shown in FIG. 59 (12)) is executed. Therefore, an effect different from the operation notice effect is executed on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected during a period other than the predetermined vibration time, so that the types of effects using the stick controller 122 are increased. Can do. Therefore, the range of effects using the stick controller 122 is widened, and the interest in games can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a combination of a predetermined vibration time and a type of the operation announcement effect from among a combination of a plurality of types of vibration time and the announcement effect. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the predetermined vibration time and the type of the operation announcement effect are different at different ratios depending on whether or not a predetermined gaming state is achieved (in this example, whether or not a big hit is achieved). Determine the combination. Therefore, since the proportion of the predetermined game state varies depending on the combination of the predetermined vibration time and the type of the operation announcement effect, the effect using the stick controller 122 can attract attention, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the timing for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate from a plurality of types of timings when the operation announcement effect is executed. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the timing for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate at a different rate depending on whether or not a predetermined gaming state is reached (in this example, whether or not a big hit is achieved). For this reason, since the proportion of the predetermined gaming state varies depending on the timing at which the stick controller 122 is vibrated, attention can be paid to the effects using the stick controller 122, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the combination of the predetermined vibration time and the type of the operation announcement effect is determined, while the vibration timing of the stick controller 122 is determined independently. The mode of determining the type of operation announcement effect and the vibration timing is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the predetermined vibration time, the type of the operation advance notice effect, and the vibration timing may be collectively determined by determining a combination of the predetermined vibration time, the type of the operation advance notice effect, and the vibration timing. Further, for example, the predetermined vibration time, the type of operation notice effect, and the vibration timing may be determined separately by individual lottery processing.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where an effect content changes by operating the stick controller 122 in an operation advance notice effect or a selection effect was shown, the mode when operation is performed in an operation advance notice effect or a selection effect is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in this embodiment. For example, the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 changes (for example, the vibration increases or the vibration rhythm (for example, the vibration is generated), based on the operation in the predetermined direction during the vibration operation of the stick controller 122. It is also possible to repeat (become larger or smaller) or change).

  Further, the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 may be varied according to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit. For example, when the big hit expectation is large, the vibration of the stick controller 122 is increased or the vibration rhythm (for example, the vibration is increased or decreased) is repeated as compared with the case where the big hit expectation is small. ) May be different.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an operation announcement effect is executed, if the operation of the stick controller 122 fails, an effect unconditionally different from the operation announcement effect (in this example, FIG. 59 (12)). In this case, the method of changing the effect when the operation is unsuccessful is shown in this embodiment. I can't catch it. For example, when the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful, the operation notice effect of the notice A or the notice B is selected as the notice type, and when the operation of the stick controller 122 fails, the notice type is given as the notice type. You may comprise so that C operation notification effect may be selected easily.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the predetermined vibration time of the stick controller 122 is determined to be 5 seconds, 3 seconds, or 1 second has been described. However, the time determined as the predetermined vibration time is the embodiment. It is not limited to what is shown in. For example, the predetermined vibration time may be determined to be extremely short (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1 second).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for effect control executes an effect (in this example, a selected effect) using a predetermined effect device (in this example, an effect display device 9). In addition, a stick controller 122 capable of vibrating operation is provided, and the stick controller 122 is controlled to vibrate over a predetermined vibration time. An effect (in this example, a selected effect) executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 is selected when an operation is performed on the stick controller 122 within a predetermined vibration time during which the stick controller 122 is vibrated. Specific effects (for example, effects indicating that the special round has been decided). Therefore, the stick controller 122 can be vibrated to perform an unexpected effect on the player, and can notify the player of the timing for operating the stick controller 122. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in a game that involves an operation, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, a specific effect (for example, for example, on the condition that the selection controller is executed before the jackpot game is started (specifically, during the fanfare effect) and the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful. However, the execution timing of the selected effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a selection effect is executed at the start of a jackpot game (for example, the first round during a jackpot game) or during a jackpot game (for example, the seventh round or the tenth round during a jackpot game). Based on the above, subsequent effects during the big hit game may be switched.

  Further, for example, the selection effect is executed at the start of the variable display or during the variable display, and the notice effect is changed or changed on condition that the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within a predetermined vibration time. The notice effect that is executed during the display may be increased. In this case, for example, on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful, a character in the step-up notice effect appears, or the character on the screen is changed to another character at the timing when the operation means such as the stick controller 122 is operated. It may be changed. Further, for example, on the condition that the stick controller 122 is operated in a predetermined direction within a predetermined vibration time, the reach production is changed (for example, transition from normal reach to super reach), or the character appearing during the reach The number may be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful, a case where a specific effect (for example, an effect indicating that the special round has been decided) is executed unconditionally is shown. However, when the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful, a lottery process for determining whether or not to make a special round may be performed. Then, on the condition that it is determined to be a special round, a specific effect (for example, an effect indicating that it is determined to be a special round) may be executed, and an effect corresponding to the special round may be executed during the big hit game . With such a configuration, even if the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful, there can be a case where it becomes a special round and a case where it becomes a special round, and the production is diversified and the interest for the game is improved. Can do.

  Further, regardless of whether the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful or not, a lottery process for determining whether or not to make a special round may be performed. In the lottery process executed in this case, for example, when the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful, it is determined that the special round is to be performed at a higher rate than when the operation of the stick controller 122 fails. May be. And even if the operation of the stick controller 122 fails, it may be determined that the special round is decided at a low rate.

  In this embodiment, a specific effect (for example, an effect indicating that a special round has been determined) is provided on the condition that the direction in which the stick controller 122 is operated is operated in a predetermined direction (for example, the right direction). However, depending on the direction in which the stick controller 122 is operated, for example, the effect mode of the special round executed during the big hit game may be different. For example, depending on whether the direction in which the stick controller 122 is operated is forward, backward, leftward, or rightward, the characters, background colors, sound effects, etc. that appear in the round effect or interval effect are displayed. It may be different.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where there is one kind of effect corresponding to the special round executed during the jackpot game on condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful has been described, but the effect corresponding to the special round There may be a plurality of types of effects. Then, on condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is successful in the selection effect, a lottery process using a random number is executed, and it is determined which of the special rounds corresponding to a plurality of types of special rounds is executed. You may make it perform to.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the stick controller 122 has a stick shape and can be operated in a plurality of directions. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to be a specific production (for example, a special round) on the condition that an operation in a predetermined direction (in this example, the right direction) of a plurality of directions is detected. Is selected and executed. Therefore, the stick controller 122 can be operated in various operation modes, an effect that requires a more complicated operation technique can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is specified on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected during a period other than the predetermined vibration time during which the stick controller 122 is vibrated. An effect different from the effect (for example, an effect indicating that it is determined to be a normal round) is selected and executed. Therefore, an effect different from the specific effect is executed on the condition that the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected in a period other than the predetermined vibration time, so that the types of effects using the stick controller 122 are increased. Can do. Therefore, the range of effects using the stick controller 122 is widened, and the interest in games can be improved.

  Also, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the timing for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate from a plurality of types of timings even when executing the selection production. Therefore, the timing at which the stick controller 122 is vibrated can be varied in various ways, the range of effects using the stick controller 122 can be expanded, and the interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player is controlled based on the variable display of the special symbol, and the production control microcomputer 100 also performs the predetermined vibration even when executing the selection production. The time is determined from a plurality of types of vibration times. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 has a long vibration time as a predetermined vibration time as the number of times it is controlled to the big hit gaming state until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation state or the short-time state ends). To decide. Therefore, as the number of times the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state increases, the predetermined vibration time becomes longer, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the vibration, so that the opportunity to operate with the stick controller 122 increases. The interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the long vibration time is determined as the predetermined vibration time as the number of times of control to the big hit gaming state during the probability change state or the short time state is shown is shown. Depending on the number of times controlled in the big hit gaming state in various modes, such as determining a short vibration time as a predetermined vibration time as the number of times controlled in the big hit gaming state increases. The predetermined vibration time may be varied.

  In this embodiment, when the selection effect is executed at the start of the jackpot game, it is determined to execute the selection effect regardless of the determination result of whether or not the jackpot is determined. Although the case where a specific effect is executed is shown when the operation is successful, the selected effect may be executed in relation to whether or not the jackpot is determined. For example, when the big hit is determined, the selection effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the big hit is not determined. Further, for example, when the big hit is determined, the operation difficulty level of the stick controller 122 is reduced (for example, the vibration time is increased) compared to the case where the big hit is not determined. The production may be easily performed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a prize based on the number of executions of the variable display stored in the RAM (no power backup) when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state. In the variable display performed by the right (holding storage) that is the determination target of the time determination, the remaining number of the variable display executed until the time-short state is ended is equal to or less than the upper limit number (eg, “8”) of the holding storage Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice using the continuous notice allocation table D that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice when it is determined that the display is a variable display that is executed based on the right that has been won in the period (holding storage) To decide. Therefore, when there are few remaining times in the short-time state, prevent the situation where the judgment result at the time of winning is inconsistent with the decision result at the start of actual fluctuation and prevent the situation where the pre-reading notice cannot be performed properly. Can do.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the winning determination based on the number of executions of the variable display stored in the RAM (without power backup) after the time reduction state is ended. The right to start winning in the period until the number of executions of the variable display executed after the short-time state ends becomes the upper limit number of the reserved storage (for example, “8”). If it is determined that the variable display is executed based on (holding storage), it is determined whether or not to perform the prefetching notice using the continuous notice allocation table E that restricts the execution of the prefetching notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the prefetching notice is impaired when it is immediately after the end of the time-saving state, and to prevent a situation in which the prefetching notice cannot be appropriately performed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to resume power supply after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice using the continuous notice allocation table D in which the execution of the prefetching notice is restricted until the time saving state is completed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the determination result at the time of winning a prize is not consistent with the determination result at the start of actual fluctuation at the time of power failure recovery, and a situation in which the prefetching advance notice cannot be performed appropriately can be prevented.

  Therefore, according to this embodiment, even when the remaining number of time reduction states is small, immediately after the completion of the time reduction state, or when a power failure is restored, the player's expectation is not impaired. A pre-reading notice can be made.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined that the continuous notice allocation tables A to C other than the continuous notice distribution tables D and E that restrict the execution of the prefetch notice become a variation pattern with super reach according to the determination at the time of winning. In such a case, the “countdown” effect mode is assigned so as to be determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a pre-reading notice of the “countdown” effect mode that is determined to be super reach. In addition, even if the continuous notice allocation tables D and E that restrict the execution of the prefetch notice are determined to be a super reach variation pattern by the determination at the time of winning a prize, the effect of “countdown” is produced as the prefetch notice presentation mode. Aspects are assigned indeterminately. For this reason, when the remaining number of short-time states is small or when a power failure is restored, inconsistency occurs in which the variable display with super reach is not executed even when the pre-reading notice of the “countdown” effect mode is executed. This can be prevented. Furthermore, even when the number of remaining times in the short-time state is small or when a power failure is restored, the pre-reading notice is not stopped at all. There is a case where the pre-reading notice is executed in an effect mode other than the “countdown” effect mode (for example, an effect mode of “holding ball change”). Therefore, it can be prevented that the player's expectation is unnecessarily impaired.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13, does the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol performed for the first reserved memory become a big hit? It is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the second reserved memory is a big hit when the game ball is won at the second start winning opening 14 To do. In addition, when one hold memory is stored as the first hold memory or the second hold memory, until the variable display performed on the one hold memory is started, when winning the prize for the one hold memory Based on the determination result of the determination, a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) for the one hold storage is executed using predetermined effect means (for example, effect display device 9) provided in the gaming machine. In this case, in this embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, control is performed so as to limit the execution of the winning determination based on the start winning winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, even in the high base state (probability change state or short time state), control is performed so as to limit the execution of the determination at the time of winning based on starting winning at the first starting winning port 13. Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol determined to be a big hit by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol will be a big hit during the big hit gaming state or the high base state It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being continuously executed in a state where the player is stocked, and to prevent excessive stimulation of the player's euphoria.

  For example, as shown in this embodiment, it is provided with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, and after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to a high base state (probability variation state or short time state), and priority is given to the variation display of the second special symbol. In the case of execution, if the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is configured to be executable, the pre-reading notice is executed based on the fact that the game ball has started and won the first start winning opening 13 during the big hit game or the high base state. If this happens, the player will recognize that the variation display result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit. In this embodiment, when the game shifts to the high base state after the big hit game is finished, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 becomes easy and the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. From the above, continuously display the variation display of the second special symbol so that the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is not interrupted while keeping the reserved memory which becomes a big hit for the first special symbol. Can do. In other words, it becomes possible to continue the game while stocking the jackpot that was recognized by executing the prefetching notice, and it acts as a stock effect indicating that the prefetching notice stocks the jackpot. End up. Then, if there is a big hit for the second special symbol without interrupting the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it will be confirmed that it will be a continuous big hit along with the big hit for the first special symbol in the stock state. Resulting in. In this way, if the reserved memory for the second special symbol is not interrupted, the game can be continued with a big hit if the gaming state is a high base state. A situation will occur where the heart is beaten more than necessary. Therefore, in this embodiment, the player's gambling feeling is required by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol will be a big hit during the big hit gaming state or the high base state. It prevents the above.

  In this embodiment, the winning determination is not performed in the big hit gaming state or the high base state (in the case of the big hit gaming state or the high base state by steps S215A and S216A). In the example, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is not performed so that the possibility of a big hit cannot be recognized. It is also possible to perform a time determination and transmit a winning determination result designation command, and determine whether or not the effect control microcomputer 100 is in a big hit gaming state or a high base state, When in a big hit game state or in a high base state, a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is not performed even if a winning judgment result designation command is received. It may be controlled so.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol, the notice effect is executed. Ban. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) and another notice effect are executed in a mixed manner and confuse the player.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, the second winning based on the start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is performed. Compared to the case where the special symbol variation display is executed, it is decided to make a small hit at a high rate. Therefore, by suppressing the occurrence frequency of the small hit game based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it can be understood that it was a small hit game despite expecting a sudden big odd hit game in the high base state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a situation in which the player is discouraged more than necessary, and to prevent a situation in which the player is unnecessarily disadvantageous.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern type determination table for detachment to change the variation pattern type of the effect symbol to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach, It is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type that does not include a variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B indicate that the common determination value (for the variation pattern type (super CA2-7) including the variation pattern with super reach, regardless of the total number of pending storages ( 230 to 251) are allocated. Moreover, the variation pattern type tables 135A and 135B for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state are common to the non-reach variation pattern types (non-reach CA2-1) regardless of the total number of pending storages. Determination values (1 to 79) are assigned. Therefore, in the case of executing a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) based on the determination that the super reach is reached, it is possible to prevent inconsistency depending on the number of reserved memories. In addition, the distribution of the variation pattern with super reach and other variation patterns can be easily changed at the design stage.

  For example, in this embodiment, it is premised that the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and the variation display is performed according to the determined variation pattern, but is read into the holding buffer at the timing when the start winning is detected. If the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) includes a random value corresponding to the super reach with high reliability for the big hit, the variation display for the super reach is performed before the variation display is executed. A continuous notice effect is executed. In this case, if the deviation variation pattern type determination table is designed as in this embodiment, when a continuous notice effect is executed, a change with a super reach corresponding to the noticed change pattern type is always performed. Since the display is executed, a notice effect corresponding to the variation pattern type can be executed in advance.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-278663, it is described that a variation pattern type is first determined and then one of the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type is determined. There are variation patterns that are included between a plurality of variation pattern types. For this reason, even when the continuous notice effect is executed in advance, other effects such as normal reach may be executed, which may cause distrust to the player. If you try not to give distrust to the player, you can only perform a notice effect that the reach will occur at best (you can not give a more reliable notice such as super reach) ), The effect of the notice effect will be significantly reduced. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute a continuous notice effect with higher reliability, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the notice effect without giving distrust to the player.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-278663 includes a variation pattern that exists in common among the variation pattern types. For this reason, it is complicated to perform a distribution between a specific variation pattern such as a super reach variation pattern and other variation patterns at the design stage. That is, even if it is desired to change only the selection ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern without changing the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern type, the selection ratios within a plurality of fluctuation pattern types Therefore, the appearance rate of the variation pattern differs between the variation pattern types. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a specific variation pattern such as a variation pattern of super reach and other variation patterns are configured not to exist in common among a plurality of variation pattern types. The appearance rate of the variation pattern can be easily changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for detachment has different determination values depending on the total number of pending storages for variation pattern types including variation patterns (normal reach and non-reach) other than super reach. Assigned. For example, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the shortening variation is only included in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 135B (see FIG. 11B) selected when the total number of pending storages is three or more. A variation pattern type (non-reach CA2-3) including (non-reach PA1-2) is selected. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories (in this example, the total number of reserved memories) is large, the operating rate can be improved by shortening the fluctuation time by averaging. In other words, if a lot of fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time such as super reach is executed when the reserved memory is accumulated, the reserved memory is not easily digested, and there is a possibility that a start winning that is invalidated may occur. When the number of reserved memories is large, the operating time is improved by averaging the fluctuation time and shortening. On the other hand, when there is a small amount of reserved memory, if the fluctuation time is short, the reserved memory is quickly consumed and the variable display is interrupted. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved storage is small, the variation display is not performed by shortening the variation so that the variation time is averaged and lengthened. Therefore, in this embodiment, inconsistency does not occur depending on the number of reserved storages while making it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the display of the effect symbols is started and the display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbols that have been temporarily stopped are temporarily stopped, and then the effect symbols are variablely displayed again. A plurality of types of quasi-continuous variation patterns (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2-3, which execute re-variation once or multiple times, Normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3). Then, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed in the same manner as when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. For this reason, even when an effect of the same effect mode is executed, it is possible to expect the possibility of both a case where a pseudo-ream effect is executed and a case where a pre-reading notice is executed. Can improve interest in

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, after one reserved memory is stored as the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory, a plurality of effect symbols until the variable display performed by the one reserved memory is started. The pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed over the variable display. Then, the chance effect symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the effect symbol until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started, and the next effect until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started. A predetermined effect (for example, display in such a manner that a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of effect symbol variation) is performed when symbol variation display is started. Therefore, it is necessary to make time adjustments such as stopping the chance eye symbol early when executing the pre-reading advance notice (continuous notice effect) of the effect mode using the derivation display of the chance eye symbol and the execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to eliminate such a situation that the process of deriving and displaying the chance symbol and the process of executing the predetermined effect overlap to cause a lack of processing. For example, in order to perform an effect similar to the above, during a single variation display, first the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, and then a predetermined effect (for example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of the variation of the effect symbol) If the display of the manner in which the flash shines above is executed to end the variable display, the continuous notice effect in the effect manner similar to that in FIG. 72 can be executed. However, such control requires processing such as temporarily stopping the chance symbol display slightly earlier than the end time of the variable display, and requires time adjustment until the end time of the variable display. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the predetermined effect at the start of the next variable display during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect of the effect mode shown in FIG. 72 is subjected to complicated processing such as time adjustment. It is possible to execute without doing.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern type is determined according to a common process when displaying. The game control microcomputer 560 is common when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b. According to the process, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol displays, the capacity of a storage area for storing a program and data for determining a variation pattern can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is a big hit or not, a normal big hit that is a round 15 big hit or a probability big hit that is a big hit and a sudden probable big hit that is a round two big hit. Is determined before the derivation display of the display result. Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the big hits of 15 rounds and big rounds of 2 rounds are different. And decide which of the transitions. Therefore, the game value of the game state to be transferred can be varied depending on which special symbol variable display is executed, and the progress of the game can be diversified.

  Further, according to this embodiment, at the time of the start winning prize before the start of the change, the game control microcomputer 560 determines in advance whether or not the change pattern of the effect pattern becomes a change pattern with super reach. . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 is to become super reach before starting the variable display of the production symbol determined to be super reach based on the determination at the time of winning when super reach is reached. An effect to be notified can be executed. For this reason, it is possible to notify that it will be super reach before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern by determining the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table for detachment. In this case, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. . Further, in the variation pattern type determination table for loss, different determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types including variation patterns other than super reach (normal reach and non-reach) according to the total number of pending storage. Therefore, by assigning the ratio of the determination value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variable display time as the total number of pending storage increases, the operating rate of the variable display decreases. It can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of the determination value allocation state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, when the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 11B is used, and the total number of reserved storage is 0 to 2 (3 or less). In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 11A is used (see steps S96 to S98). As shown in FIG. 81, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the ratio becomes less (normal reach, super reach) than when the total number of pending storages is 0-2. When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, as shown in FIG. 11B, the non-reach CA 2-2 variation pattern type is selected and the non-reach PA 1-2 that is the variation pattern of the shortened variation is selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display is reduced as much as possible by shortening the average fluctuation time as the total number of pending storage increases.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, regardless of the total number of pending storages, a common determination value (230˜) is used for the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B). 251). Therefore, at the time of starting winning, it is possible to easily determine in advance whether or not it will be super reach if only the value of the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is confirmed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the distribution of the determination value of the variation pattern type determination table for deviation is made different for the two types of the total pending storage number being 0 to 2 or 3 or more, The method of differentiating the determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the distribution may be made more finely stepwise according to the total number of pending storage. In this case, for example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0, 1 and the offset for the total pending storage count 2, the total pending storage count 3 and the total pending storage count 4 A variation pattern type determination table may be prepared in advance, and the distribution of the variation pattern type with reach and the variation pattern type of the shortened variation may be further varied in stages. In addition to such an example, various combinations of the deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared in advance are conceivable. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a completely common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to the variation pattern type accompanied by super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage. However, the determination value for super reach in one of the deviation variation pattern type determination table may include the determination value for super reach in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. . FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 82, when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the determination values 230 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach, whereas the total number of reserved storages 0 to In the case of 2, determination values 200 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it becomes easy to become super reach beforehand. Can be determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the determination value range of 100 to 199 among the determination values 0 to 199 assigned to the non-reach variation pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Are not included in the range 0 to 99 of the determination value assigned to the non-reachable variation pattern type when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. On the other hand, the range 230 to 251 of the determination value assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach when the total pending storage number is 3 or more indicates the super value when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. All of the determination value ranges 200 to 251 assigned to the variation pattern types with reach are included. Therefore, when the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning a prize, it can be easily determined in advance that it will be super reach.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 82, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more. The determination values 200 to 229 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and the ranges to which the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns with normal reach are not overlapped. The range of determination values assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach may be overlapped between the case and three or more cases. For example, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type with normal reach is assigned. On the other hand, the determination values 180 to 229 may be assigned. Even in the case of such a configuration, some of the determination values 180 to 229 among the determination values 180 to 229 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Only the range of 199 is included in the range of determination values 100 to 199 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the combined pending storage number is 0 to 2.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been shown in which a variation pattern type with a super reach is used as a collective variation pattern type, and a variation pattern type determination table for deviation is configured. However, for each super reach type (for example, super reach A and The variation pattern type may be divided into super reach B). FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 83, determination values 230 to 237 are assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach A regardless of the total number of pending storages, and the variation pattern type with super reach B is assigned. Determination values 237 to 251 are assigned. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it is easily determined in advance that it will be super reach. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, even when the deviation variation pattern type determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 83, the distribution of the determination values of super reach A and super reach B may be different for each table. As in the modification shown in FIG. 4, for example, the determination value for super reach A and B in one deviation variation pattern type determination table is the determination value for super reach A and B in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. It may be included. Moreover, you may comprise so that allocation of the judgment value with respect to the super reach A and the super reach B may partially overlap between tables. This can be similarly applied to both this embodiment and each modification shown in this embodiment.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach includes the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity. Therefore, even when the effect of notifying that it will be a super reach is not executed, the variable display with the pseudo-ream can be performed, so that the expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when determining a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, when the total number of pending storage is small, In comparison, a variation pattern having a large number of pseudo-variation re-variation execution times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where variable display with a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variations is frequently performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), and the variable display operating rate Can be further prevented.

  FIG. 84 shows the assignment state of the determination value in the variation pattern type determination table for deviation when looking at the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity as the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. It is explanatory drawing shown. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern type of normal CA2-6 is selected (see FIG. 11B). Then, as shown in FIG. 84, the fluctuation pattern of the normal PB2-1 with the pseudo-ream with one re-variation number is selected (see FIGS. 13 and 7). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, normal CA2 based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. A variation pattern type of −5 is selected (see FIG. 11A). Then, as shown in FIG. 84, the fluctuation pattern of the normal PB2-2 with the pseudo-continuation with the number of re-variations of 2 is selected (see FIGS. 13 and 7).

  As shown in FIG. 84, even if the effect of notifying that it will be a super reach is not executed, there is a case where a variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream may be performed, so that a sense of expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state is increased. Can improve the interest of the game. As shown in FIG. 84, when variable display with pseudo-continuations is performed, when the total number of pending storages is as small as 0 to 2, variable display with two re-variation pseudo-continuations is executed, When the number of reserved memories is as large as 3 or more, variable display with a pseudo-continuity with a small number of re-variations is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variation execution times is frequently performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation rate of variable display is lowered.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with pseudo-continuity and a variation without pseudo-continuation as a specific variable display pattern. (See super CA2-7 in FIGS. 7 and 13), but the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 only involves super reach. And a variation pattern that does not involve pseudo-continuations may be included. Further, even when a variation pattern with pseudo-ream is used together with super reach, the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern that has only super reach and does not involve pseudo ream as a specific variable display pattern. Variation pattern types that include only quasi-continuous and super-reach and quasi-continuous variation patterns, normal reach and quasi-continuous variation pattern types, and non-reach and variability pattern types that involve quasi-continuation. May be assigned to a range other than the determination values 230 to 251 as a variation pattern type including a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream is determined as a variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is not less than a predetermined number (three in this embodiment). It is possible to determine a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. In addition, when a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity is determined as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is less than a predetermined number (one or two in this embodiment). It is possible to determine a variation pattern with ream. Therefore, by executing a quasi-ream whose number of re-variations is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the player can have a sense of expectation that it may become super reach. Can be improved.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an assignment state of determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table when attention is paid to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations. In this embodiment, the super CA 2-7 variation pattern type with super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage (see FIG. 11). . Then, as shown in FIG. 84, super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, which are fluctuation patterns with a pseudo-continuity with three re-variations, may be selected (see FIGS. 13 and 7). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the normal CA 2-6 variation pattern type that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 (FIG. 11 ( B)). Then, as shown in FIG. 85, the normal PB2-1, which is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with one revariation count, may be selected (see FIGS. 13 and 7). When the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-5 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 (FIG. 11). (See (A)). Then, as shown in FIG. 85, the normal PB2-2, which is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with two revariations, may be selected (see FIGS. 13 and 7).

  As shown in FIG. 85, by executing the pseudo-ream with the number of re-variations of 3 or more, the player can have a sense of expectation that it may become super reach, and the interest in the game is increased. Can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 includes three pseudo-variations as a specific variable display pattern. A variation pattern with reaming is included, and a variation pattern with one or two re-variations is included as a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern in a range other than that. This shows a case where the display pattern and a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern include a variation pattern with a pseudo-series that does not overlap the number of re-variations. May be. For example, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with re-variation 3 to 5 pseudo-continuations as a specific variable display pattern. A variable pattern other than the specific variable display pattern may be included in a range other than that including a variation pattern with re-variation 1 to 3 pseudo-continuations.

  It should be noted that any variation pattern with any type of super reach within the range to which the variation pattern type with super reach in the deviation variation pattern type determination table (the range to which the determination values 230 to 251 are allocated) is assigned. It is not limited to what is shown in this embodiment whether it is assigned or how much the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuous is assigned. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of assignment in a range in which a variation pattern type with super reach is assigned.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), not all types of reach are allocated, but among the reach having high reliability for some jackpots (for example, super reach C in super reach A to C). Those with pseudo-continuations and having a large number of pseudo-continuations (for example, four times) may be collectively assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251. For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), regardless of the type of reach, all the reach (for example, super reach A to super reach C) is accompanied by a pseudo run, and the number of pseudo runs. Those having a large number may be collectively assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), apart from the fluctuation pattern of only super reach (for example, super reach A is not accompanied by a pseudo-ream), it is accompanied by a pseudo-ream and the number of times of the pseudo-ream Many variation patterns may be assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251 as specific variation patterns.

  In this embodiment, the case of using two types of reach, that is, super reach A and super reach B, is shown as the super reach. You may comprise so that a super reach may be performed. For example, when the super reach C is configured to be executed in addition to the super reach A and B as shown in FIG. 86, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs the same processing as that of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Super CA 3-3, which is a variation pattern type for super reach, from the variation pattern type determination table for jackpots shown in (A) and (B) and the variation pattern type determination table for loss shown in FIGS. 11 (A) and (B). And Super CA2-7 will be decided. Then, the super CA 3-3 and the super CA 2-7, which are the variation patterns for super reach, are each configured to include the variation patterns with super reach A to C, and the super reach is determined based on the determined variation pattern types. A variation pattern involving any one of A to C may be determined.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined to be a big hit, it is a fluctuation pattern with a super reach at a higher rate than when it is determined not to be a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, when it is determined to be out of place, the determination value is assigned only to a narrow range of 230 to 251 for super reach, whereas FIGS. As shown in (2), when it is determined to be a big hit, a determination value is assigned to a super reach over a wide range of 150 to 251 or 80 to 251. Therefore, the expectation to the big hit gaming state when variable display with super reach is performed can be enhanced, and the interest in gaming can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined that the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach is a variation pattern with normal reach or a non-reach variation pattern. Therefore, even when variable display with super reach is not performed, variable display with normal reach can be executed, giving a sense of expectation that it may be a big hit gaming state. Further improvement can be achieved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation pattern type to include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach or a variation pattern type not including a variation pattern with super reach. Decide on. Then, when it is determined that the variable display pattern type of the effect symbol is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach, it is determined that the variation pattern of the effect symbol is a variation pattern with super reach. Therefore, the distribution between the variation pattern with super reach and the variation pattern other than that can be easily changed at the design stage only by changing the distribution of the variation pattern type.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 4). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine as shown below is also shown.

  After a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a predetermined start area (for example, the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14), a start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied (for example, the first A plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special symbol, the first special symbol, the second special symbol are not executed, and the game is not a big hit game state). A variable display device (for example, a first special symbol display device 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b) for performing variable display of the second special symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the specific display result ( For example, a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, and when the game medium passes through the starting area, the specific gaming state In A random number for determining a specific gaming state (for example, a random number for determining a big hit (random R)) for determining whether or not to execute, and a variable display determining random number for determining a variable display pattern of identification information (for example, fluctuation) Extraction means for extracting pattern type determination random numbers (random 2) and variation pattern determination random numbers (random 3)) (for example, a part for executing steps S214A and S214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and a start area For variable display in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed, the predetermined gaming state determination random number and variable display determination random number extracted by the extraction means are set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 ) As a reserved storage means (for example, a first reserved storage buffer, a second reserved storage buffer), and variable Predetermining means (for example, for game control) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state using a specific game state determination random number before the display result derivation display based on the fact that the start condition shown in FIG. The step of executing step S61 in the microcomputer 560), the determination result of the predetermining means, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means when the variable display start condition is satisfied, and the variable display extracted by the extracting means Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control micro) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) of identification information based on a random number value for determination and determination values corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns. Portion of computer 560 that executes steps S91 to S105) and the determination result of the variable display pattern determination means. The variable display executing means for executing variable display of the identification information (for example, the part for executing steps S108, S109, S125 to S128, S32 in the game control microcomputer 560) and before the determination by the variable display pattern determining means When the game medium passes through the starting area, it is determined whether or not to shift to the specific game state based on the value of the random number for determining the specific game state extracted by the extraction unit, and extracted by the extraction unit Based on the value of the random number for determining the variable display and the determination value corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns, the variable display pattern of the identification information is a specific variable display pattern (for example, a super display pattern) of the plurality of types of variable display patterns. Start determination means for determining whether or not a variation pattern with reach (for example, a game control microcontroller) The portion that executes steps S217A and S217B in the computer 560) and the identification that is the determination target when it is determined by the start determination means to shift to the specific gaming state or when it is determined to be a specific variable display pattern A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a continuous notice effect of the effect modes shown in FIGS. 72 to 75) before the information variable display start condition is satisfied, and a specific variable display pattern At least a part of the determination values corresponding to is set with the same determination value regardless of the number of hold storages stored by the hold storage means when the variable display start condition is satisfied, and is different from a specific variable display pattern. The judgment value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern corresponds to the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the variable display start condition is satisfied. Different determination values are set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B and FIG. 81, superreach is performed regardless of whether the total pending storage number is 0 to 2 or 3 or more. Determination values in the range of 230 to 251 are assigned to variation pattern types including accompanying variation patterns. Different variation values are assigned to variation pattern types including variation patterns with non-reach and normal reach other than super reach depending on whether the total number of pending storage is 0 to 2 or 3 or more. The non-specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern in which the reach state is not established. The variable display from the start of variable display of identification information to the display of the display result in comparison with the specific variable display pattern The variable display pattern determining unit stores the variable display pattern for shortening when the variable display start condition is satisfied, including the variable display pattern for shortening which is short (for example, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 shown in FIG. 7). When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the number of determination values corresponding to the variable display pattern for shortening is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number. 11 is used to determine the variable display pattern (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S98 when Y in step S96, as shown in FIG. 11B). The variation determination type of the non-reach CA1-2 can be determined by selecting the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-3 in which the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 for shortening variation is set). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the random number for determining variable display extracted by the extracting means matches the same determination value, it is determined whether or not a specific variable display pattern is obtained (for example, the game control micro In steps S217A and S217B, the computer 560 determines that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is within a range of 230 to 251. Lever, determines to be a variation involving super reach pattern type (super CA2-7)) game machine, characterized in that. According to such a configuration, the variable display result and the variable display mode are notified in advance before the variable display of the identification information is started (pre-reading advance notice) while preventing the situation where the operation rate of the variable display is reduced as much as possible. ) Can be made possible.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, a parrot machine or the like that controls a predetermined gaming state based on variable display of identification information.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
120 Push Button 121 Trigger Button 122 Stick Controller 123 Tilt Direction Sensor Unit 124 Push Sensor 125 Trigger Sensor 126 Vibrator Motor

Claims (5)

Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Production execution means for performing production using a predetermined production device,
The operating means can be vibrated,
Vibration operation control means for vibrating the operation means over a predetermined vibration period;
The effect executed by the effect execution means includes a specific effect selected when an operation is performed on the operation means within the predetermined vibration period in which the operation means is vibrated. Gaming machine. The operation means has a stick shape and can be operated in a plurality of directions.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect execution means executes a specific effect when an operation in a predetermined direction among the plurality of directions is performed. 3. The effect execution means executes an effect different from a specific effect when the operation means is operated during a period other than a predetermined vibration period during which the operation means is vibrated. Game machines. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising a timing determining unit that determines a timing for causing the operating unit to vibrate from a plurality of types of timings. A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on variable display of identification information,
A vibration period determining means for determining a predetermined vibration period from a plurality of types of vibration periods;
The vibration period determining means determines a long vibration period as the predetermined vibration period as the number of times of control to the specific gaming state until a predetermined condition is satisfied increases. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Images